D69265GC10 sg1

D69265GC10
Edition 1.0
September 2011
D74263
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g
Ops Center Release 1
Administration
Volume I Student Guide
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Copyright 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Disclaimer
This document contains proprietary information and is protected by copyright and
other intellectual property laws. You may copy and print this document solely for your
own use in an Oracle training course. The document may not be modified or altered
in any way. Except where your use constitutes "fair use" under copyright law, you
may not use, share, download, upload, copy, print, display, perform, reproduce,
publish, license, post, transmit, or distribute this document in whole or in part without
the express authorization of Oracle.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. If you
find any problems in the document, please report them in writing to: Oracle University,
500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood Shores, California 94065 USA. This document is not
warranted to be error-free.
Restricted Rights Notice
If this documentation is delivered to the United States Government or anyone using
the documentation on behalf of the United States Government, the following notice is
applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
The U.S. Governments rights to use, modify, reproduce, release, perform, display, or
disclose these training materials are restricted by the terms of the applicable Oracle
license agreement and/or the applicable U.S. Government contract.
Trademark Notice
Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names
may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Authors
Jeff Ferreira
Steve Selting
Gary Riseborough
Technical Contributors
and Reviewers
Steve Stelting
Gary Riseborough
Mahesh Sharma
Publisher
Syed Imtiaz Ali
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
iii
Contents

Preface

1 Introducing Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1
Objectives 1-2
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center R1 Value Proposition 1-3
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center R1 Business Challenges 1-4
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center R1 Value Proposition 1-5
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Enterprise Manager Ops Center 1-6
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center Ops Center Overview 1-8
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Enterprise Manager Ops Center Ops Center
Product Design 1-10
Product Compatibility Application Software Requirements 1-12
Product Compatibility OS Management Capabilities 1-14
Supported Technologies Expanded System Management 1-15
New Features 1-17
Supported Technologies Supported Systems for Management 1-18
Supported Technologies Web Browser and Virtualization 1-21
Main Features 1-22
Main Features Discovery and Management 1-23
Main Features Provisioning 1-24
Main Features OS Update 1-25
Main Features Monitoring 1-26
Main Features Problem Management 1-27
Main Features Reporting 1-28
Main Features Virtualization 1-30
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Benefits 1-31
Enterprise Manager Ops Center User Interface 1-32
User Interface Navigation Panel 1-34
User Interface Center Panel 1-35
User Interface Action Panel 1-37
User Interface Jobs Panel 1-38
Quiz 1-39
Summary 1-41

C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
iv
2 Understanding Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1
Architecture
Objectives 2-2
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture Overview 2-3
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture Basic Deployment 2-5
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture Knowledge Base 2-6
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture Enterprise Controller 2-7
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture Proxy Controller 2-10
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture Co-located Proxy Controller 2-11
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture Multiple Proxy Controllers 2-12
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture Agent Controller 2-14
Communication Methods Connected Mode 2-15
Communication Methods Disconnected Mode 2-16
Communication Methods Networking Principles 2-17
Communication Methods Ports, Protocols and Connections 2-18
Communication Methods Ports and Protocols 2-19
Communication Methods Subscription Model 2-22
Communication Methods Jobs 2-23
Communication Methods Aggregated Data Model 2-24
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Technologies Assets 2-25
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Technolgies Protocols 2-27
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Integration with Grid Control 2-28
Oracle System Monitoring Plug-In 2-30
Quiz 2-32
Summary 2-36
Practice 2 Overview: Verifying Access to the RLDC 2-37

3 Installing and Configuring Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Objectives 3-2
Installation Overview 3-3
System Requirements: Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controller 3-5
System Requirements: Using the OCDoctor.sh Script 3-7
Ops Center Configuration Options Example Configuration 3-8
Configuration Options Configuration Wizard 3-9
Preparing for Installation Accessing Software and Documentation 3-10
Preparing for Installation Preparing an Oracle Solaris System 3-11
Preparing for Installation Preparing a Linux System 3-13
Enterprise Manager Ops Center HA Configuration HA Overview 3-15
Enterprise Manager Ops Center HA Configuration Failover Overview 3-17
Performing an Installation Installation Overview 3-19
Performing an Installation Beginning the Installation 3-20
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
v
Performing an Installation System Requirements Checks 3-21
Performing an Installation install Script Progress 3-22
Performing an Installation Installation Complete 3-23
Performing an Installation Logging In to Enterprise Manager Ops Center 3-24
Performing an Installation Introduction Panel 3-25
Performing an Installation Configuration Panel 3-26
Performing an Installation Choose Deployment Panel 3-27
Performing an Installation Configuring the Local Proxy Controller 3-28
Performing an Installation Proxy Controllers Panel 3-29
Performing an Installation Remote Proxy Controllers Panel 3-30
Performing an Installation Proxy Controller Status Panel 3-31
Performing an Installation Discover and Manage Panel 3-32
Performing an Installation Discovered Hardware Panel 3-33
Performing an Installation Manage Hardware Panel 3-34
Performing an Installation Discovered Operating Systems Panel 3-35
Performing an Installation Manage Operating Systems Panel 3-36
Performing an Installation Registration Panel 3-37
Performing an Installation Services Panel 3-38
Performing an Installation Software Update Service Panel 3-39
Performing an Installation Connected Mode Software Update Panel 3-40
Performing an Installation Disconnected Mode Software Update Panel 3-41
Performing an Installation Create Storage Library Panel 3-42
Performing an Installation Provisioning Service Panel 3-44
Performing an Installation Configure DHCP on Proxy Panel 3-45
Performing an Installation Summary Panel 3-46
Performing an Installation Configuration Complete 3-47
Installation Validation 3-48
Deploying Additional Proxies 3-50
Deploying Additional Proxies Deploy Proxy Wizard 3-51
Deploying Additional Proxies Manually Deploying a Proxy Controller 3-52
Uninstalling Ops Center 3-54
Quiz 3-55
Summary 3-59
Practice 3 Overview: Installing Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center 3-60

4 Discovering Assets
Objectives 4-2
Asset Discovery Overview 4-3
Using Custom Discovery 4-5
Using Custom Discovery Performing a Custom Discovery 4-6
Using Custom Discovery Custom Asset Discovery Panel 4-7
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
vi
Declaring Assets 4-8
Declaring Assets Using the Declare Configured Assets Action 4-9
Declaring Assets XML Discovery File 4-10
Declaring Assets Using the Declare Configured Assets Action 4-11
Declaring Assets Using the Declare Unconfigured Assets Action 4-12
Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard 4-14
Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard Discover and Manage Panel 4-16
Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard Running a Discovery Job 4-17
Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard Manage Hardware Panel 4-18
Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard Discovered Operating
Systems Panel 4-19
Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard Manage Operating
Systems Panel 4-20
Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard Summary Panel 4-21
Using Automatic Discovery 4-22
Registering Assets 4-24
Registering Assets Running the Register Assets Wizard 4-25
Registering Assets Running a Service Tag Discovery 4-26
Registering Assets Selecting Assets to Register 4-27
Registering Assets Running the Asset Registration 4-28
Configuring a Windows OS for Discovery 4-29
Configuring a Windows OS for Discovery Discovering a Windows OS 4-30
Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series Server Overview 4-31
Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series Server Using Custom Discovery 4-32
Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series Server Successful Discovery 4-33
Discovering a Sun ZFS Storage Appliance 4-34
Quiz 4-35
Summary 4-39
Practice 4 Overview: Discovering Assets 4-40

5 Managing Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries
Objectives 5-2
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries Overview 5-3
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries Overview Software Libraries 5-4
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries Overview Storage Libraries 5-5
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries Overview Solaris/Linux OS Updates 5-6
Creating Software Libraries 5-7
Creating Software Libraries Creating an EC Local Library 5-8
Creating Software Libraries Creating an EC NAS Library 5-10
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries 5-12
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries Uploading an OS Image 5-13
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
vii
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries Importing an OS Image 5-14
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries Downloading an OS Image 5-15
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries Viewing OS Image Details, Plans
and Profiles 5-16
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries Managing Images 5-18
Uploading Firmware Images into Software Libraries 5-20
Uploading Firmware Images into Software Libraries Managing Images 5-26
Uploading Firmware Images into Software Libraries 5-27
Uploading Firmware Images into Software Libraries - Viewing Firmware Plans
and Profiles 5-28
Editing Library Attributes 5-29
Quiz 5-30
Summary 5-33
Practice 5 Overview: Managing Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries 5-34

6 Introducing Plan Management
Objectives 6-2
Plans and Profiles: Overview 6-4
Plans and Profiles: Browser UI 6-5
Plan Management UI 6-7
Deployment Plans and Profiles Structure and Creation 6-8
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Creating a Deployment Plan with a Template 6-10
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Copying an Existing Deployment Plan 6-11
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Creating a Deployment Profile 6-12
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Copying an Existing Deployment Profile 6-13
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Updating Deployment Plans and Profiles 6-14
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Edited Deployment Profiles 6-15
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Updating Deployment Plans 6-16
Applying Deployment Plans 6-17
Applying Deployment Plans: Deployment Plans Summary Screen 6-18
Applying Deployment Plans: Deployment Plan Action Link 6-19
Applying Deployment Plans: Asset or Group Action Link 6-20
Applying Deployment Plans: Deployment Plan Wizard 6-21
Operational Plans 6-22
Monitoring Profiles 6-23
Problems Knowledge Base 6-24
Operational Plans and Profiles: Overview 6-25
Operational Plans and Profiles: Creating a New Operational Plan 6-26
Operational Plans and Profiles: Script and Variable Definition 6-27
Operational Plans and Profiles: Job Execution 6-28

C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
viii
Operational Plans and Profiles: Applying an Operational Plan to
Execute a Script 6-29
Operational Plans and Profiles: Job Execution and Results 6-30
Quiz 6-31
Summary 6-34
Practice 6 Overview: Using Profiles and Plans 6-35

7 Managing and Monitoring Assets Using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Objectives 7-2
Asset Management and Monitoring Managing Assets 7-4
Asset Management Available to be Managed Assets 7-6
Asset Management Available to be Managed Assets Tab 7-7
Asset Management Manage Asset Wizard for OS Assets 7-8
Asset Management Agent Provisioning Job in the UI 7-9
Asset Management Agent Provisioning Job Details 7-10
Asset Management Managed OS Asset After Agent Provisioning 7-11
Manual Agent Installation Overview 7-12
Manual Agent Installation Agent Installation and Configuration 7-13
Manual Agent Installation Agent Install Script Options 7-14
Manual Agent Installation agentadm Command 7-15
Manual Agent Installation Required agentadm Configuration Arguments 7-16
Manual Agent Installation Optional agentadm Configuration Arguments 7-17
Manual Agent Installation Agent Configuration Using agentadm 7-18
Manual Agent Installation Manual Agent Configuration Results in the UI 7-19
Agent Configuration Agent Configuration for the EC and Proxy 7-20
Agent Configuration Configuring the EC Agent in the UI 7-21
Asset Management and Monitoring Overview 7-22
Asset Management and Monitoring Hardware Management and Monitoring 7-23
Asset Management and Monitoring System Capabilities (OS Management) 7-25
Asset Management and Monitoring System Capabilities (SP Management) 7-26
Asset Management and Monitoring Monitored System Data (SP Management) 7-27
Asset Management and Monitoring OS Management and Monitoring 7-28
Asset Management and Monitoring OS Capabilities 7-30
Asset Management and Monitoring Monitored OS Data (Summary) 7-31
Asset Management and Monitoring Monitored OS Data (Utilization) 7-32
Asset Management and Monitoring Dashboard View of Assets 7-33
Asset Management and Monitoring Dashboard View for All Assets 7-34
Asset Management and Monitoring Dashboard View for a Single Asset 7-35
Asset Management and Monitoring Dashboard View of a Managed Network 7-37
Asset Grouping Overview 7-38
Asset Grouping Standard Views of Assets 7-39
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
ix
Asset Grouping Operating System View of Assets 7-40
Asset Grouping Server View of Assets 7-41
Asset Grouping User-Defined Groups 7-42
Asset Grouping Creating User-Defined Groups 7-43
Asset Grouping User-Defined Groups in the UI 7-47
Asset Management Organizing Assets 7-48
Asset Management Organizing Single Assets in the UI 7-49
Asset Management Organizing Managed Assets in the UI 7-50
Asset Management Organizing Grouped Assets in the UI 7-51
Quiz 7-52
Summary 7-54
Practice 7 Overview: Managing and Monitoring Assets Using Enterprise
Manager Ops Center 7-55

8 Provisioning Operating Systems Using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Objectives 8-2
OS Provisioning Overview 8-3
OS Provisioning Overview Preparing for OS Provisioning 8-5
Managing OS Images Storing OS Images 8-6
Managing OS Images Identifying Default OS Profiles 8-7
Managing OS Images Identifying Default Deployment Plans 8-8
Configuring DHCP 8-9
Configuring DHCP DHCP Config Action 8-10
Configuring DHCP Subnets Action 8-11
Configuring DHCP External DHCP Servers Action 8-12
Managing OS Profiles Editing or Copying OS Provisioning Profiles 8-13
Managing OS Profiles Creating OS Provisioning Profiles 8-15
Managing OS Profiles Creating a Solaris OS Provisioning Profile 8-18
Managing OS Profiles Creating a Linux OS Provisioning Profile 8-29
Managing Deployment Plans 8-34
Managing Deployment Plans Creating a Deployment Plan 8-35
Provisioning an OS 8-37
Provisioning an OS Apply Deployment Plan Action 8-38
Provisioning an OS Install Server Action 8-39
Provisioning an OS Provision OS Wizard Minimal Interaction 8-40
Provisioning an OS Provision OS Wizard Override Values 8-43
Installing JET Modules 8-45
Installing JET Modules Obtaining JET Packages 8-47
Quiz 8-49
Summary 8-54
Practice 8 Overview: Provisioning Operating Systems 8-55
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
x
9 Provisioning Firmware Using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Objectives 9-2
Firmware Provisioning Overview 9-3
Firmware Provisioning Overview Preparing for Firmware Provisioning 9-4
Managing Firmware Images Storing Firmware Images 9-5
Managing Firmware Images Uploading Firmware Using Manual Metadata 9-7
Managing Firmware Images Uploading Firmware Using XML Metadata 9-14
Managing Firmware Images Uploading Firmware 9-16
Managing Firmware Images Editing Firmware Metadata 9-17
Managing Firmware Images Identifying Default Firmware Profiles 9-18
Managing Firmware Images Identifying Default Deployment Plans 9-19
Managing Firmware Profiles Editing or Copying Firmware Provisioning Profiles 9-20
Managing Firmware Profiles Editing a Firmware Provisioning Profile 9-21
Managing Firmware Profiles Copying a Firmware Provisioning Profile 9-27
Managing Firmware Profiles Creating a Firmware Provisioning Profile 9-29
Managing Deployment Plans Creating a Deployment Plan 9-31
Managing Deployment Plans Editing a Deployment Plan 9-33
Running Firmware Reports 9-34
Provisioning Firmware 9-42
Provisioning Firmware Apply Deployment Plan Action 9-43
Provisioning Firmware Update Firmware Action 9-44
Provisioning Firmware Update Firmware Wizard Minimal Interaction 9-45
Provisioning Firmware Update Firmware Wizard Override Values 9-46
Enabling Automatic Firmware Downloads 9-48
Quiz 9-52
Summary 9-57
Practice 9 Overview: Provisioning Firmware 9-58

10 Performing Update Management Using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Objectives 10-2
OS Updating Overview 10-3
OS Updating Initiating an OS Update 10-4
OS Updating Jobs and Tasks 10-5
OS Updating 10-7
OS Update Profiles 10-8
OS Update Policies 10-10
Knowledge Base 10-12
OS Channels 10-13
Deployment Plans 10-14
Deployment Plans Referencing Update Profiles 10-15
OS Channels Activation 10-17
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xi
OS Channels Contents 10-19
Activated OS Channels 10-20
Catalogs 10-21
Bulk Uploads 10-22
Bulk Upload 10-23
Bulk Upload Results 10-27
Bulk Upload 10-30
Bulk Upload Results 10-31
OS Update Prerequisites 10-32
OS Update Process 10-33
The OS Update Job Window 10-34
OS Update Job Schedule 10-37
Initiating an OS Update Job 10-39
View/Modify Catalog 10-40
View/Modify Catalog Window 10-41
Creating a Historical Catalog 10-42
Creating a Historical Catalog Results 10-43
Viewing the Current Catalog Solaris 10-44
Viewing the Current Catalog Linux 10-45
Modifying the Current Catalog 10-47
Modifying the Current Catalog Submitting the OS Update Job 10-48
Modifying the Current Catalog Job Information 10-49
Modifying the Current Catalog Job Details 10-50
Modifying the Current Catalog Job Target Details 10-51
Modifying the Current Catalog Job Task Log 10-52
Comparing Catalogs 10-53
Comparing Catalogs Snapshot Options 10-54
Comparing Catalogs Main Window 10-55
Comparing Catalogs Selecting the Snapshot 10-56
Comparing Catalogs Selecting the Target 10-57
Comparing Catalogs - Differences Displaying all Nodes 10-58
Comparing Catalogs - Differences Displaying only Changed Nodes 10-59
Comparing Catalogs - Tasks 10-60
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports 10-61
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Change History Report 10-63
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Change History Report Results 10-64
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Baseline Analysis Report 10-65
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Baseline Analysis Report Results 10-68
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Profile Analysis Report 10-69
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Profile Analysis Report Results 10-72

C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xii
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Recommended Software
Configuration Report 10-73
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports RSC Report Results 10-75
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Common Vulnerabilities and
Exposures Report 10-76
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports CVE Report Results 10-78
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Host Compliance Report 10-79
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Host Compliance Report Results 10-80
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Incident Report 10-81
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Incident Report Results 10-85
OS Update Job Submit in Simulation Mode 10-86
OS Update Job Target Details Log 10-87
OS Update Job Job Status 10-88
OS Update Job Answer Pending Questions 10-89
OS Update Job Task Log 10-90
OS Update Job Copying a Simulation Job 10-91
OS Update Job Resubmitting an Actual Run 10-92
OS Update Job Task Log 10-93
Quiz 10-94
Summary 10-98
Practice 10 Overview: Performing Update Management Using Enterprise
Manager Ops Center 10-99
Practice 10 Overview: Performing Update Management Using Oracle
Enterprise Manager Ops Center 10-100

11 Performing Advanced Update Management Using Oracle Enterprise Manager
Ops Center
Objectives 11-2
Disconnected Mode 11-3
Harvester Script 11-4
Harvester Script Command Line Options 11-5
Harvester Script Examples 11-7
Harvester Script Proxy Configuration 11-14
Uploading Harvester KB Bundles 11-15
Uploading Harvester Bundles Open the Connection Mode Dialog 11-16
Uploading Harvester Bundles Locate the Harvester Bundle from the EC 11-17
Uploading Harvester Bundles Load the Harvester Bundle 11-18
Uploading Harvester Bundles Harvester Load Confirmation 11-19
Switching Connected/Disconnected Mode 11-20
Connected/Disconnected Mode Selecting During Initial Configuration 11-21
Connected/Disconnected Mode Switching Mode After Installation 11-22
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xiii
Connected/Disconnected Mode Disconnected Mode Confirmation 11-23
Local Content 11-24
Local Content Navigation 11-25
Local Content Actions 11-27
Local Content Upload Local Action 11-28
Local Content Configuration Files 11-29
Local Content Upload Configuration File 11-30
Local Content Local Package/RPM 11-31
Local Content Upload Local Software Package 11-32
Using Local Content 11-33
Updating with Solaris Live Upgrade 11-34
Solaris Live Upgrade Background 11-35
Solaris Live Upgrade Boot Environments 11-36
Solaris Live Upgade File Systems 11-37
Solaris Live Upgrade Boot Environments and File Systems 11-38
Solaris Live Upgrade Updating Inactive Boot Environments 11-39
Solaris Live Upgrade Creating Boot Environments 11-40
Solaris Live Upgrade Supported Operating Systems 11-41
Solaris Live Upgrade Browser UI Changes 11-42
Solaris Live Upgrade Activating a Boot Environment 11-44
Solaris Live Upgrade OS Update Job with Live Upgrade 11-48
Quiz 11-54
Summary 11-58
Practice 11 Overview: Performing Advanced Update Management 11-59

12 Managing Storage Libraries
Objectives 12-2
Storage Library Overview 12-3
Storage Library Overview NAS Storage Libraries 12-4
Storage Library Overview Fibre Channel Storage Libraries 12-5
Creating a NAS Storage Library Overview 12-6
Creating a NAS Storage Library Configuring NFS-Shared Storage 12-7
Creating a NAS Storage Library New NAS Storage Action 12-9
Viewing NAS Storage Library Information Summary Tab 12-11
Viewing NAS Storage Library Information Usage Tab 12-12
Viewing NAS Storage Library Information Disks Tab 12-13
Viewing NAS Storage Library Information Problems Tab 12-14
Viewing NAS Storage Library Information Monitoring Tab 12-15
Viewing NAS Storage Library Information Viewing the Libraries Tree 12-16
Loading Images into a NAS Storage Library 12-17
Loading Images into a NAS Storage Library Importing an ISO Image 12-18
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xiv
Creating a Fibre Channel Storage Library Overview 12-20
Creating a Fibre Channel Storage Library Configuring Fibre Channel Storage 12-22
Creating a Fibre Channel Storage Library Verifying Access to FC LUNs 12-23
Creating a Fibre Channel Storage Library Configuring Oracle Solaris I/O
Multipathing 12-25
Creating a Fibre Channel Storage Library Using the New Fibre Channel
Library Action 12-29
Adding LUNs to a Fibre Channel Storage Library Using the Add LUN Action 12-39
Associating a Fibre Channel Library Using the Associate Libraries Action 12-42
Editing Library Attributes 12-45
Removing Storage Libraries 12-46
Quiz 12-47
Summary 12-52
Practice 12 Overview: Managing Storage Libraries 12-53

13 Managing Oracle Solaris Zones
Objectives 13-2
Oracle Solaris Zones Overview 13-3
Oracle Solaris Zones Overview Types of Zones 13-4
Creating Oracle Solaris Zones 13-6
Creating Oracle Solaris Zones Using the Create Zone Action 13-7
Zone Data Structures Sparse Root Zone, NAS Storage 13-19
Zone Data Structures Sparse Root Zone, Local Storage Library 13-21
Zone Data Structures Whole Root Zone, Fibre Channel Storage 13-23
Shutting Down Zones 13-25
Booting Zones 13-26
Editing Zone Configurations 13-27
Adding Storage to Zones 13-28
Adding File Systems to Zones 13-30
Attaching to a Zone Console 13-31
Cloning Zones 13-32
Adopting Zones 13-34
Monitoring Zones Global Zone Information 13-40
Monitoring Zones Non-Global Zone Information 13-45
Deleting Zones 13-49
Quiz 13-50
Summary 13-53
Practice 13 Overview: Managing Oracle Solaris Zones 13-54

C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xv
14 Managing Oracle VM Server for SPARC
Objectives 14-2
Oracle VM Server for SPARC Overview 14-3
Oracle VM Server for SPARC Key Virtualization Concepts 14-4
Oracle VM Server for SPARC OVMSS Architecture 14-5
OVMSS Management Overview 14-6
OVMSS Management System Support and Requirements 14-8
OVMSS Management OS Support and Requirements 14-9
OVMSS Server Management OVMSS Control Domain Provisioning 14-10
OVMSS Server Management Control Domain Provisioning Profile 14-11
OVMSS Server Management Control Domain - OSP Parameters 14-12
OVMSS Server Management Control Domain - Control Domain Parameters 14-13
OVMSS Server Management Control Domains After Provisioning 14-14
OVMSS Server Management Control Domain Management and Monitoring 14-15
OVMSS Server Management Control Domain Management Actions 14-16
OVMSS Server Management Editing Control Domain Attributes 14-17
OVMSS Server Management Managing Networks and Storage Libraries 14-18
OVMSS Server Management Managing Domain, Naming Services
and Logging 14-19
OVMSS Server Management Alert Monitoring Profile for Control Domains 14-20
OVMSS Guest Management Logical Domain Profile 14-21
OVMSS Guest Management Logical Domain Profile - Domain Identity 14-23
OVMSS Guest Management Logical Domain Profile - CPU and Memory 14-24
OVMSS Guest Management Logical Domain Profile - Storage and Disks 14-25
OVMSS Guest Management Logical Domain Profile - Networks 14-26
OVMSS Guest Management Logical Domain Profile - Summary 14-27
OVMSS Guest Management Configuring and Installing Logical Domains 14-28
OVMSS Guest Management Configure and Install Logical Domains 14-29
OVMSS Guest Management Creating Logical Domains 14-30
OVMSS Guest Management Creating Logical Domains - Storage
Configuration 14-31
OVMSS Guest Management Creating Logical Domains- Network
Configuration 14-32
OVMSS Guest Management Logical Domains after Creation 14-33
OVMSS Guest Management Guest Management and Monitoring 14-34
OVMSS Guest Management Guest Management Action Links 14-35
OVMSS Guest Management Guest Management Links in the
Control Domain 14-36
OVMSS Guest Management Alert Monitoring Profiles for Guests 14-37
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Overview 14-38
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Virtual Pool Creation Prerequisites 14-39
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xvi
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Create Virtual Pool 14-40
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Create Virtual Pool - Specify Policies 14-41
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Create Virtual Pool - Select Networks 14-42
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Create Virtual Pool - Define
Characteristics 14-43
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Create Virtual Pool - Specify Members 14-44
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Create Virtual Pool - Associate Libraries 14-45
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Create Virtual Pool - Summary 14-46
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Virtual Pool Management 14-47
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Management Actions for a Virtual Pool 14-48
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Guest Management for a Virtual Pool 14-49
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Management Actions for Control Domains 14-50
OVMSS Virtual Pool Management Migrating Logical Domains 14-51
Quiz 14-53
Summary 14-56
Practice 14 Overview: Managing Oracle VM Server for SPARC 14-57

15 Managing Problems, Service Requests and Notifications Using Oracle
Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Objectives 15-2
Monitoring and Problem Management Overview 15-3
Asset Monitoring Monitoring Profiles and Alert Rules 15-4
Asset Monitoring Alert Monitoring Profile 15-5
Asset Monitoring Monitoring Profiles 15-6
Asset Monitoring Customizing Alert Monitoring Profiles 15-7
Alert Monitoring Profiles Alert Rules 15-8
Alert Monitoring Profiles Adding an Alert Monitoring Rule 15-9
Alert Monitoring Profiles Boolean Alert Rule 15-10
Alert Monitoring Profiles Enumerated Alert Rule 15-11
Alert Monitoring Profiles Expression-Based Alert Rule 15-12
Alert Monitoring Profiles Threshold Alert Rule 15-13
Monitoring and Alerts Notifications, Problems and Service Requests 15-14
Monitoring and Alerts Notifications and Notification Profiles 15-15
Monitoring and Alerts Notifications in the Message Center 15-16
Monitoring and Alerts Notification Pop-Up for Assets 15-17
Monitoring and Alerts Notification Profiles 15-18
Problems and the Message Center Managing Problems in the Message
Center 15-19
Problems and the Message Center Unassigned Problems 15-20
Problems and the Message Center Assigning a Problem to a User 15-21
Problems and the Message Center Viewing Annotations 15-22
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xvii
Problems and the Message Center Placing an Asset in Maintenance Mode 15-23
Problems and the Message Center Executing an Operational Plan 15-24
Problems and the Message Center Adding an Annotation 15-25
Problems and the Message Center Take Action on Problem 15-26
Problems and the Message Center Open Service Request 15-27
Problems and the Message Center Closing a Problem or Marking a Problem
as Fixed 15-28
Problems and the Message Center Removing an Asset from Maintenance
Mode 15-29
Problems and the Message Center Problems Knowledge Base 15-30
Summary 15-31
Practice 15 Overview: Managing Problems, Service Requests and
Notifications 15-32

16 Working with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports
Objectives 16-2
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reporting Capabilities Overview 16-3
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Charts Overview 16-4
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Charts System Chart Energy and
Power Consumption 16-5
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Charts OS Chart CPU Utilization 16-6
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reports Overview 16-7
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Report Capabilities Reports in the BUI 16-9
OS Update Reports Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports 16-10
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Standard Report Options 16-11
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Scheduling a Report 16-13
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Saving a Report as a Template 16-14
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Solaris/Linux OS Updates 16-15
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Baseline Analysis Report
(Select Baseline) 16-16
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Baseline Analysis Report
(Modify Patch Lists) 16-17
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Baseline Analysis Report (Summary) 16-18
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Baseline Analysis Report Results
(Interactive) 16-19
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Baseline Analysis Report Results
(PDF File) 16-20
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Change History Report 16-21
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Profile Analysis Report 16-22
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Recommended Software Configuration
Report 16-23
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xviii
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports CVE Report 16-24
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Host Compliance Report 16-25
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Incident Compliance Report 16-26
Solaris and Linux OS Update Reports Additional Reports 16-28
Additional OS Update Reports Distribution Update Report 16-29
Additional OS Update Reports Solaris Update Compliance Report 16-30
Additional OS Update Reports Service Pack Compliance Report 16-31
Additional OS Update Reports Service Pack Compliance Report Results 16-32
Additional OS Update Reports Package Compliance Report 16-33
OS Update Reports Windows OS Update Reports 16-34
System Information Report Overview 16-36
System Information Report Attribute Selection 16-37
System Information Report Attribute Filters 16-38
System Information Report Report Results (PDF File) 16-39
Problem Reports Overview 16-40
Problem Summary Report Problem Report Parameters 16-41
Problem Summary Report Report Results (PDF File) 16-42
Firmware Compliance Report Overview 16-43
Firmware Compliance Report Report Parameters 16-44
Quiz 16-45
Summary 16-48
Practice 16 Overview: Working with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Reports 16-49

Appendix A: Managing Hardware Resources using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
Objectives A-2
Hardware Management Overview A-3
Hardware Management Hardware Management Methods A-4
Hardware Management Discovery and Management A-5
Hardware Management Asset Discovery Categories A-6
Hardware Management Management Capabilities A-7
Hardware Management Management Tabs for Systems A-8
Hardware Management Dashboard Tab A-9
Hardware Management Summary Tab A-10
Hardware Management Hardware Tab A-11
Hardware Management Capabilities Tab A-12
Hardware Management Connectivity Tab A-13
Hardware Management Console Tab A-14
Hardware Management Problems Tab A-15
Hardware Management Service Requests Tab A-16
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xix
Hardware Management Monitoring Tab A-17
Hardware Management Charts Tab A-18
Hardware Management Energy Tab A-19
Hardware Management Jobs Tab A-20
Hardware Management Configuration Tab A-21
Hardware Management Actions for Hardware Assets A-22
Hardware Management Actions Menu for a System A-23
Hardware Management Actions and Plans A-24
Hardware Management Deployment Plans A-25
Hardware Management Deployment Plans and Profiles in the UI A-26
Hardware Management Configure Service Processor A-27
Hardware Management Configure Service Processor Profile A-28
Hardware Management Configure RAID A-29
Hardware Management Configure RAID Profile A-30
Hardware Management Hardware Provisioning and Update Plans A-31
Hardware Management Update Firmware A-32
Hardware Management Provision OS A-33
Hardware Management Power Management A-34
Hardware Management Power Consumption for a Server A-35
Hardware Management Energy Cost Settings A-36
Hardware Management M-Series Server Management A-37
Hardware Management M-Series Server Discovery and Management A-38
Hardware Management M-Series Server Actions and Plans A-39
Hardware Management M-Series Dynamic Domain Profile A-40
Hardware Management Sun Blade Chassis Management A-45
Hardware Management Chassis Dashboard and Actions A-46
Hardware Management Storage Management A-47
Hardware Management Storage Shares A-49
Hardware Management Logical Units A-50
Hardware Management Switch Management A-51
Summary A-53
Practice 10 Overview: Managing Hardware Resources using Enterprise
Manager Ops Center A-54

Appendix B: Managing Oracle Solaris Cluster
Objectives B-2
Oracle Solaris Cluster Overview B-3
Oracle Solaris Cluster Key Definitions and Concepts B-4
Cluster Management Capabilities, Support and Requirements B-6
Cluster Management Discovery of Solaris Clusters B-8
Oracle Solaris Cluster Discovery Solaris Cluster Discovery Credentials B-9
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
xx
Oracle Solaris Cluster Discovery Clustered OS Instances After Management B-10
Oracle Solaris Cluster Discovery Solaris Cluster Asset View B-11
Cluster Management Cluster Monitoring Capabilities B-12
Solaris Cluster Monitoring Network Data UI for Solaris Cluster B-13
Solaris Cluster Monitoring Alert Monitoring Profile for Solaris Cluster B-14
Solaris Cluster Monitoring Dashboard for Cluster Node B-15
Solaris Cluster Monitoring Alert Monitoring Profile for Cluster Node B-16
Cluster Management Cluster Control Capabilities B-17
Oracle Solaris Cluster Upgrade Step 1: Identify Upgrade B-18
Oracle Solaris Cluster Upgrade Step 2: Select Partition B-19
Oracle Solaris Cluster Upgrade Step 3: Select Policy for Failed Upgrade B-20
Oracle Solaris Cluster Upgrade Step 4: Select Profile B-21
Oracle Solaris Cluster Upgrade Step 5: Summary B-22
Cluster Management Provisioning and Upgrading Cluster Nodes B-23
Cluster Provisioning and Update Download Cluster Profiles and Action Scripts B-24
Cluster Provisioning and Update Add Action Script to Local Content B-25
Cluster Provisioning and Update Action Scripts for Local Content B-26
Cluster Provisioning and Update Import Profile for Solaris Cluster B-27
Cluster Provisioning and Update Imported Profile for Solaris Cluster B-28
Cluster Provisioning and Update OS Update Profiles for Solaris Cluster B-29
Cluster Management Upgrading Solaris Cluster Nodes B-30
Quiz B-31
Summary B-33

C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preface
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preface - 3
Profile
Before You Begin This Course
Before you begin this course, you should be able to perform most common system
administration tasks in Oracle Solaris 10. General Oracle Solaris and network
administration skills are useful in successfully completing this course.
How This Course Is Organized
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration is an
instructor-led course featuring lectures and hands-on exercises. Written practice
sessions reinforce the concepts and skills that are introduced. This course uses
equipment in Oracles Remote Lab Data Center to support hands-on lab exercises.
Required Prerequisite Courses
System Administration for the Oracle Solaris 10 OS Part 1 Ed 2 (D61738GC20)
Suggested Prerequisite Courses:
Oracle VM Server for SPARC Administration (formerly Logical Domains
Administration) (D69086DC10)
Oracle Solaris Containers Administration (D61772GC20)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preface - 4
Related Publications
Oracle Publications
Title Part Number
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Readme E21574-04
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Installation Guide for Oracle Solaris Operating
System E18419-03
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Installation Guide for Linux Operating Systems
E18420-03
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center User's Guide E18415-03
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Advanced User's Guide E18416-03
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Quick Start Guide E24504-01
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Concepts Guide E17968-03
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Site Preparation Guide E18418-03
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Provision and Update Guide
E18417-03
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Administration Guide E18414-03
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Security Guide E20615-01
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Reference Guide E21484-03
Additional Publications
The above publications and more titles related to Oracle Enterprise Manager
products are located here:
http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E11857_01/nav/management.htm
System release bulletins
Installation and users guides
read.me files
International Oracle Users Group (IOUG) articles
Oracle Magazine
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preface - 5
Typographic Conventions
The following two lists explain Oracle University typographical conventions for words
that appear within regular text or within code samples.
Typographic Conventions for Words Within Regular Text
Convention Object or Term Example
Courier New User input; Use the SELECT command to view
commands; information stored in the LAST_NAME
column, table, and column of the EMPLOYEES table.
schema names;
functions; Enter 300.
PL/SQL objects;
paths Log in as scott
Initial cap Triggers; Assign a When-Validate-Item trigger to
user interface object the ORD block.
names, such as
button names Click the Cancel button.
Italic Titles of For more information on the subject see
courses and Oracle SQL Reference
manuals; Manual
emphasized
words or phrases; Do not save changes to the database.
placeholders or
variablesEnter hostname, where
hostname is the host on which the
password is to be changed.
Quotation marks Lesson or module This subject is covered in Lesson 3,
titles referenced Working with Objects.
within a course
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preface - 6
Typographic Conventions (continued)
Typographic Conventions for Words Within Code Samples
Convention Object or Term Example
Uppercase Commands, SELECT employee_id
functions FROM employees;
Lowercase, Syntax variables CREATE ROLE role;
italic
Initial cap Forms triggers Form module: ORD
Trigger level: S_ITEM.QUANTITY
item
Trigger name: When-Validate-Item
. . .
Lowercase Column names, . . .
table names, OG_ACTIVATE_LAYER
filenames, (OG_GET_LAYER ('prod_pie_layer'))
PL/SQL objects . . .
SELECT last_name
FROM employees;
Bold Text that must CREATE USER scott
be entered by a IDENTIFIED BY tiger;
user
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Introducing Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g
Ops Center Release 1
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 2

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you should be able to:
Understand IT challenges and the value proposition of
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center R1
Describe how Ops Center fits into the Enterprise Manager
product suite
Describe Enterprise Manager Ops Center product
compatibility and supported technologies
Identify Enterprise Manager Ops Center main features
Identify Enterprise Manager Ops Center main benefits
Describe the Enterprise Manager Ops Center User
Interface
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center R1 Value Proposition

Challenges for IT Operations: Technical Challenges
IT organizations today encounter a variety of technical system management challenges.
Increased demands
Greater Complexity
More systems
Value Proposition
Global applications
Highly available applications
Greater security, reliability, flexibility
Different Hardware and OS
Multiple versions of OS and software
Complex dependencies for software
Broader coverage
More business applications
Internal and external customers
Increased
Demands
Greater
Complexity
More
Systems
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center R1 Business Challenges

Organizations face increasing business challenges in addition to technical challenges.
Time to market
Reduced cost
Business requirements
Business Challenges
Challenges for IT Operations: Business Challenges
Applications are now part of the business
New products/services need applications
Rapidly changing business requirements
Pressure to do more with less
Consolidated system administration
Centralized systems in data centers
Regulatory constraints (e.g. SOX)
Reporting requirements
Compliance validation and checks
Time to
Market
Reduced
Cost
Business
Requirements
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Value Proposition
For IT Operations Managers and System Administrators who
manage:
Rapid growth
Data center consolidation
Enterprise compliance
Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides management tools to
discover, provision, update, and manage the IT environment
worldwide
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center

The Enterprise Manager 11g product suite consists of a comprehensive set of business-
driven management tools that provide:
Business-driven application management
Integrated, application-to-disk management
Integrated systems management and support
Enterprise Manager Grid Control and Enterprise Manager Ops Center interact with managed
assets that function in different layers of the data center asset stack.
Grid Control software enables businesses to improve application, middleware, and database
performance.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center is Oracle's comprehensive system management solution for
managing data center assets, including:
Operating system instances
Virtual machines
Servers
Storage devices
Networks
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Enterprise
Manager Ops Center
Enterprise Manager Ops Centers Strategic Role:
Enterprise Manager Grid Control and Ops Center are
highly complementary technologies
Enterprise Manager Grid
Control effectively manages
the database, middleware
and application layers
Enterprise Manager Ops
Center manages assets in the
OS, Virtual Guest, Server,
Storage and Network layers
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center (continued)

Together, these management applications deliver unparalleled data center infrastructure and
asset maintenance and reliability.
Oracle Enterprise Manager Grid Control allows administrators to monitor and manage
application-to-disk assets in the datacenter.
You can install and configure these applications to work together, or you can use them
independent of one another.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center: Ops Center Overview

Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center is Oracle's comprehensive system management solution
for managing data center assets. Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides complete asset
life cycle management, including:
Discovering and registering manageable system and OS assets throughout the network
Provisioning operating systems, including Oracle Solaris SPARC, Oracle Solaris x86,
Oracle Linux, Red Hat Linux, and SUSE Linux onto one or many systems, and updating
firmware
Provisioning virtualized operating system instances, including Oracle VM Server for
SPARC, and Oracle Zones instances
Testing OS updates before deployment and activation through simulation, and
integration with Solaris live upgrade.
Configuring service processors, RAID controllers, and dynamic system domains on
Oracle M-Series servers
Deploying assets using deployment plans. Deployment plans enable you to specify how
to deploy assets, using sets of instructions organized by profiles.
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center
Ops Center Overview
Enterprise Manager Ops Center offers complete asset life cycle
management, including:
Provisioning operating systems
and firmware
Provisioning virtualized OS
instances
Testing through simulation
Configuring service processors,
RAID, and M-Series servers
Deploying assets
Monitoring and remotely
controlling assets
Changing and patching systems
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center: Ops Center Overview (continued)
Monitoring and controlling system and OS assets throughout the data center
Changing and patching, keeping the data center up-to-date with update management for
Oracle Solaris , Oracle Linux, Red Hat Linux, SuSE Linux, and Windows
Generating reports, using advanced OS evaluation and auditing capabilities to ensure
security and compliance
Remote management capabilities help to increase availability and utilization, and
minimize downtime.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center: Ops Center Product Design
Enterprise Manager Ops Center functions as multi-tiered management software, designed
using a set of components that include an Enterprise Controller, one or more Proxy
Controllers, and Agents.
Enterprise Controller:
Each Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance uses one Enterprise Controller. The
Enterprise Controller and maintains a central repository of Ops-Center data, tracks asset
and job status, and serves as the central point of administration for all Ops Center
activity.
Proxy Controller:
Each Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance uses at least one Proxy Controller. Proxy
Controllers are responsible for executing jobs that they pull from the Enterprise
Controller.
Agents:
Enterprise Manager Ops Center can install agents in operating systems. Operating
systems can act on tasks that agents pick up from Proxy Controllers.
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Enterprise
Manager Ops Center Ops Center Product Design
Enterprise Controller
Proxy Controllers
Browser UI
(also CLI, JMX, and
WS-MAN)
Knowledge Base
and
Web-Hosted
Services
Physical Systems
Operating Systems
Virtual Assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center: Ops Center Product Design
(continued)
Browser UI:
Users interact with Enterprise Manager Ops Center primarily through the browser user-
interface. Alternatives include a command line interface (CLI), Java Management
Extensions (JMX), and Web Services for Management (WS-MAN) interfaces.
Knowledge Base:
The Knowledge Base is the repository for metadata about Oracle Solaris and Linux OS
components. Metadata stored in the Knowledge Base includes information that
describes patch dependencies, standard patch compatibilities, withdrawn patches,
download and deployment rules.
Managed assets include physical systems, operating systems, and virtualized operating
systems.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Ops Center Product Compatibility: Application Software Requirements

A Complete compatibility matrix is available:
http://wikis.sun.com/download/attachments/217724707/CertifiedSys
tems.xls
Product Compatibility
Application Software Requirements
Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides two groups of
software:
Server software: Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controller
Agent software: Virtualization Controller and Agent
The server software bundle includes all agent software
Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controller software run on
these operating systems:
Solaris 10 SPARC 11/06 and later
Solaris 10 X86 11/06 and later
Oracle Enterprise Linux 5.3 and 5.5
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5.0, 5.3 and 5.5
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Application Software Requirements
Agent Controller software is compatible with these operating
systems:
Solaris SPARC 8, 9 and 10; Solaris X86 9 and 10
Novell SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9, 10, 11
Oracle Enterprise Linux 5.3 and 5.5
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4.x, 5.0, 5.2, 5.3, 5.5
Windows Support (MS SCCM 2007 used for patching)
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2008
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Product Compatibility : OS Management Capabilities

The list of supported operating systems for provisioning does not include Solaris 8 SPARC as
this product has been end of lifed (EOLd).
The procedures for updating Windows uses the Microsoft System Center Configuration
Manager (SCCM) to implement the software updates.
OS Management Capabilities
Operating System Provision Monitor Update Live Upgrade
Solaris 10 SPARC Physical and Virtual
Solaris 10 X86 Physical only
Solaris 9 SPARC
Solaris 9 X86
Solaris 8 SPARC
Red Hat 3
Red Hat 4
Red Hat 5 (includes 5.1 5.5)
SUSE Linux 8, 9, 10, 11
Microsoft Windows XP
Microsoft Windows 2003
Microsoft Windows 2008
Oracle Enterprise Linux 5
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Supported Technologies
Expanded System Management
Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 offers
expanded system management capabilities, including:
New Hardware:
SPARC T3 Servers (T3-1, T3-1B, T3-2, T3-4)
Sun Storage 7110, 7210, 7310, 7410
Sun ZFS Storage 7120, 7320, 7420, 7720
Sun Ethernet & Infiniband Switches (4 models in all)
Expanded System Management:
M-Series Servers: 3000, 4000, 5000, 8000, 9000
Supports domain creation and management
Provides M-Series and domain-level monitoring views
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Expanded System Management
General Support for Systems
Support for all ILOM-based Sun servers
Support for all ALOM, ELOM, XSCF and RSC SP-enabled
Sun systems
Most systems have minimum & recommended firmware
version
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
New Features
Reference for additional information on these features:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/New+Features
New Features
New features for the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
11g Release 1
Dashboards
Problem management
Links between Enterprise Manager Ops Center and Oracle
Enterprise Manager Grid Control
Enhanced profile functionality
Operational and deployment plans
Plan management
Improvements for storage and library management
Oracle Solaris Cluster support
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Supported Systems for Management
Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 supports
managing these systems:
Sun Blade Modular Systems
Chassis: 6000, 6048, 8000, 8000P
Server Modules: T6300, T6320, T6340, X6220, X6240,
X6250, X6270, X6270M2, X6275, X6420, X6440, X6450,
X8400, X8420, X8440, X8450, T3-1B
CMT Servers
Sun Fire T1000, T2000
Sun SPARC Enterprise T1000, T2000, T5120, T5140,
T5220, T5240, T5440
SPARC T3-1, T3-2, T3-4
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Sun M-Series Servers
SPARC Enterprise M3000, M4000, M5000, M8000, M9000
X86 Servers (Sun Fire)
X2100, X2100M2, X220M2, X2250, X2270, X4100,
X4100M2, X4140, X4150, X4170M2, X4200m X4200M2,
X4240, X4250, X4270, X4275, X4440, X4500, X4540,
X4600, X4600M2, X4640, X4800, V20Z, V40Z
Netra Servers
Sun Netra 240, 1290, 440, 6000 Chassis, CP3260,
X4200M2, X4250, X4270, X4450, T2000, T5220, T5440,
T6320
Legacy Servers (Sun Fire)
V125, V210, V215, V240, V245, V250, V440, V445, V490,
V880
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Basic rules for system management
Systems can be managed through the operating system or
service processor interface
Service processor management is required for most
advanced capabilities, including:
Management
Full monitoring (some actions are possible through the OS)
Firmware provisioning (only for supported Sun systems)
Automated operating system provisioning (OSP)
Manual OSP is possible through the OS
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Web Browser and Virtualization
Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 is certified with
these browsers:
Mozilla Firefox: 2.x and 3.x
Internet Explorer: 7.x and 8.x
Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 supports these
virtualization technologies:
Solaris Containers: Solaris 10 U4 and later (SPARC and
X86)
Oracle VM Server for SPARC (LDoms)
LDom 1.2
LDom 1.3
LDom 2.0
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Main Features
Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 offers these
main features:
Asset discover and management of both physical and
virtual assets
Operating system and firmware provisioning
OS update management
Monitoring
Problem management
Reporting
Virtualization
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Main Features: Discover and Management

Discovery
Standard protocols, include
- SSH, IPMI, Telnet, SNMP, Service tags
Management
Management of Operating System assets involves installing the Enterprise Manager
Ops Center agent software on the asset.
Managed assets are automatically displayed in a hierarchy in the managed assets tree
Managed assets added to one or more groups based on the asset type.
Groups
Managed assets are added to one or more groups automatically, based on the asset
type or user defined group rules
Managed assets can be added manually to user defined groups
Groups enable you to quickly locate and view assets of a specific type
You can also act on groups, such as running compliance checks on all assets in the
group or changing monitoring thresholds
Main Features
Discovery and Management
Discovery
Enterprise Manager Ops Center can discover the servers,
storage devices, operating systems, and virtual machines
in your data center using one of several standard protocols
Management
Once discovered, assets are then managed by Enterprise
Manager Ops Center
Managing assets enables the administrator to perform
provisioning, monitoring, and updating operations
Assets can be grouped so that specific operations can be
performed on multiple assets concurrently
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Main Features: Provisioning

Enterprise Manager Ops Center facilitates automated firmware provisioning and OS
provisioning by using a combination of image libraries, profiles, and deployment plans.
This allows an administrator to perform consistent installation of an asset using a deployment
plan outlining a combination of an OS Provisioning, OS Update, Software installation and
Update, and postinstall scripting, and assinging a monitoring profile.
The images, profiles and deployment plans are stored on the Enterprise Controller.
Provisioning can be performed on a single asset, or a group of assets.
Main Features
Provisioning
Provisioning Firmware
Updates firmware from the Enterprise Controller library to
managed servers, chassis or storage devices Action
controlled by a Firmware Profile
Provisioning Operating Systems
Enables you to install supported operating systems from
the software library on the Enterprise Controller onto
managed assets
Action controlled by an OS Provisioning Profile
Applying Deployment Plans
Apply profiles in sequence to combine OS provisioning,
updates, software installation, script execution and
monitoring
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Main Features: OS Update

Installation, Update and Removal of software and patches
Enterprise Manager Ops Center is designed to reduce the complexity of updating a
large number of diverse operating systems, standardize the patch installation process,
minimize downtime, track changes, and automate patching without user interaction.
You control the update process, the level of automation, the scheduling, and the number
of concurrent updates.
You can apply customized controls for one system or a group of systems and schedule
the updates to deploy during periods of low usage.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center supports update management for
Oracle Solaris
Oracle Linux
RedHat Enterprise Linux
Novell SUSE Enterprise Linux
Microsoft Windows operating systems.
Main Features
OS Update
OS Update
Installs, Updates and Removes software and patches
Reduces the complexity of updating a large number of
diverse operating systems
Automates patching without user interaction
Automatically manages the patch and software
dependencies
Provides version control and rollback capability
Supports an update simulation capability
Updates Solaris Live Upgrade environments
Action controlled by an OS Update Profile
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Main Features: Monitoring

Monitoring
The software is designed to make it easy to monitor and manage a large numbers of
assets from a single console.
It provides end to end server awareness and robust monitoring capabilities for the
hardware, storage devices, and operating systems in your data center.
You can track system-defined parameters for hardware power consumption, hardware
status (temperature, fan speed, and voltage), and key OS statistics (load, CPU,
memory.)
For more robust monitoring, the software uses editable rules and event thresholds to
monitor your systems.
- A rule defines a specific monitored resource and the rule parameter defines when
an alert is triggered.
- Specific rules are available for assets such as ILOMs, Oracle Solaris Cluster,
storage devices, and DHCP and system-defined rules that monitor resource
values, thresholds, value comparators, and JMX expressions for specific attributes.
Main Features
Monitoring
Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides robust
monitoring capabilities for
Hardware
Operating Systems
Storage Devices
Switches
Enterprise Manager Ops Center allows administrators to
configure thresholds on system defined parameters to
trigger alerts
OS performance statistics
Hardware status (temperature, fan speed, voltage etc.)
Power consumption
Monitoring profiles can be defined and assigned to assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Main Features
Problem Management
Enterprise Manager Ops Center displays detected
problems under the Message Center in the Navigation
pane
Appears in the unassigned problem queue
Shown as a critical, warning, or informational alert
Can be configured to send alert to an email address
Problems can be assigned to authorized users for
resolution
Can view/update annotations, comments, suggested actions
Annotations can be saved to a problem knowledge base
with information to be used for future problems
A service request can be raised with Oracle on supported
systems from the Message Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Main Features: Reporting

You can gather more detailed information about job history, firmware, OS updates, and then
export that information to CSV or PDF output.
Problem Reports
Problem reports summarize problem details for a specific managed asset or detailed
information about specific problems.
Firmware Compliance Reports
Firmware Compliance Reports enable you to maintain consistent firmware versions
across your data center. You can associate one of your firmware profiles with the report,
then run the Firmware Compliance Report to determine if the firmware on the asset
complies with your firmware profile's specifications.
Update Reports
Like firmware compliance reports, update reports give insight into the OS compliance state
and recommends patches and packages. Generate a report to view the state of your OS
patch levels, and then use the report output to update specific operating systems.
Main Features
Reporting
You can create the following reports in Enterprise Manager
Ops Center:
Problem Reports
Firmware Compliance Report
Update Reports
Server Provisioning Reports
Hardware Configuration Reports
Various reports can be output to files with the following
formats
Comma separated value (CSV)
Portable Document Format (PDF)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Main Features: Reporting (continued)

Server Provisioning Reports
Obtain a report of historical server provisioning actions. Run this simple ad-hoc report to
obtain details about the Deployment Plan provisioning activities that occurred over a
specified time period. Get specific information about the activity, including who ran the
provisioning job, which profiles were selected, and the final outcome.
Hardware Configuration Reports
Use the Hardware Configuration Reports to obtain hardware change history and inventory.
Inventory reports enable you to filter by hardware assets and or components. You select
the asset and component properties for the report output content and its sorting.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Main Features
Virtualization
Enterprise Manager Ops Center has integrated
management and creation of
Solaris Zones
Oracle VM Server for SPARC (LDoms)
Enterprise Manager Ops Center enables you to discover,
provision, update, monitor, and manage the virtual
systems
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Benefits
The main benefits of Enterprise Manager Ops Center include:
In-depth knowledge of software and patches including
dependency and other metadata
OS Update provides simulation, snapshot and rollback
capabilities
Ability to perform the same operation on multiple systems
Lights-out bare metal provisioning
Problem notification and management integration into My
Oracle Support to raise service requests
Management and monitoring of system assets and OS
assets (both physical and virtual)
Integration with Oracle Enterprise Manager Grid Control
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Enterprise Manager Ops Center User Interface
The browser user interface (BUI) for Ops Center:
Presents a consolidated view of the assets managed by
Lists the actions that you can perform on them
Shows Enterprise Manager Ops Center management
information.
The BUI is divided into 4 main panels
Center panel
Navigation panel
Action panel
Jobs panel
You can expand or collapse the Navigation, Action and Jobs
panels to provide additional space in the center panel.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Enterprise Manager Ops Center User Interface
Jobs Panel
Center Panel
Action Panel
Navigation Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
User Interface: Navigation Panel

The Navigation panel provides access to:
Assets Lists all assets that are known to Enterprise Manager Ops Center. You can view all
managed assets from this panel, or drill down to a specific group of assets, such as
operating systems.
Plan Management Access pre-defined deployment plan templates, your customized plans,
profiles, and policies. The Problems Knowledge Base is also accessed from Plan
Management.
Libraries Store your firmware and OS images, OS update components and metadata,
local content, and virtualization content. Local content is information, such as updates,
software, or other files that you upload into Enterprise Manager Ops Center are available in
the Software Libraries section. Oracle VM Server for SPARC virtualization content, including
logical domains, ISO images, and backup images, are available in the Storage Libraries.
Reports Create reports or report templates, including OS update, firmware, hardware, and
asset reports.
Managed Networks View details about the virtual networks defined for Enterprise Manager
Ops Center.
Administration Perform administrative functions, such as defining users and user roles,
and managing the Enterprise Manager Ops Center components.
User Interface
Navigation Panel
The Navigation panel is the left-side panel
and provides first level navigation
Provides access to the following information:
Assets
Plan Management
Libraries
Reports
Managed Networks
Administration
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

User Interface
Center Panel
The center panel is the main work area of the Enterprise
Manager Ops Center BUI
It displays the details of the item that you selected in the
Navigation panel
This panel contains tabs to further define the information
presented
There is a title in the top left corner to show you what is
selected from the Navigation panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

User Interface
Center Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

User Interface
Action Panel
The Action panel is the right-side panel and
contains a list of actions that are context
sensitive to the selected resource in the
navigation panel
Many actions launch a pop-up wizard page
that will guide you through the task
Can be expanded to show the icon and text
description of each action or collapsed to
just show the icon of each action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
User Interface: Jobs Panel

With the Jobs panel expanded, you can filter the jobs displayed by selecting a particular
status. The complete list of job status values are:
All jobs
Jobs in progress
Jobs waiting for user input
Jobs failed
Jobs partially successful
Jobs stopped
Jobs scheduled
Jobs successful
The Jobs panel also has a search field in the top right corner, where you can search for a
particular job using the Job ID, Job Type, Job Name, Owner, Target and/or Description.
The default search is a string search against all of the fields.
Job display can be sorted by any column by clicking on the column heading, or by selecting
sort ascending or sort descending from the heading pull down menu.
User Interface
Jobs Panel
The Jobs Panel is located at the bottom of the BUI and
contains job status information for all submitted jobs
You can expand this panel to see a list of all jobs with a
particular status, including:
Jobs in progress
Jobs waiting for user input
Jobs failed
Jobs scheduled
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a, b, d, e
Quiz
Which of the following are supported Operating Systems for the
Enterprise Controller layer
a. Solaris 10 SPARC
b. Solaris 10 x86
c. SUSE Linux Enterprise Server
d. Oracle Enterprise Linux
e. RedHat Enterprise Linux
f. Windows Server 2003
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: Enterprise Manager Ops Center has
management support for the Sun ZFS Storage 7x20 system?
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Summary
In this lesson, you should have learned how to:
Understand IT challenges and the value proposition of
Describe how Enterprise Manager Ops Center fits into the
Enterprise Manager product suite
Describe Enterprise Manager Ops Center product
compatibility and supported technologies
Identify Enterprise Manager Ops Center main features
Identify Enterprise Manager Ops Center main benefits
Describe the Enterprise Manager Ops Center User
Interface
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Understanding Oracle Enterprise Manager
11g Ops Center Release 1 Architecture
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Objectives
Describe Enterprise Manager Ops Center architecture
Identify communication methods in Enterprise Manager
Ops Center
Describe Enterprise Manager Ops Center technologies
Understand Enterprise Manager Ops Center integration
with Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g
Describe the Oracle System Monitoring Plug-in for Oracle
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Overview

Managed Objects
Enterprise Manager Ops Center managed assets
Operating Systems
Oracle Solaris
Oracle Enterprise Linux
Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
Novel SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES)
Microsoft Windows (XP, 2003, and 2008)
Virtual Machines
Oracle Solaris Containers
Oracle VM Server for SPARC
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture
Overview
Enterprise Manager Enterprise Manager Ops Center is a multi-
tier enterprise application that manages
Operating systems
Virtual Machines
Servers
Storage devices
Major architectural components
Proxy Controller
Agent Controller
Knowledge base
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Overview (continued)

Servers
ILOM based Sun/Oracle servers
ALOM based Sun/Oracle servers
ELOM based Sun/Oracle servers
XSCF based Sun/Oracle servers
RSC based Sun servers
IPMI based Service Processor controlled servers
Storage Devices
Sun Storage 7x10 Unified Storage Systems
Sun ZFS Storage Appliance 7x20
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Basic Deployment

This diagram illustrates a basic Enterprise Manager Ops Center deployment.
Information from the knowledge Base (or KB) is downloaded by the Enterprise
Controller
The Enterprise Controller stores the information along with basic management tools
The Proxy Controller distributes the load
The Agent provides the update and management capabilities for an Operating System
asset
Basic Deployment
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Knowledge Base
The KB is the repository for metadata about Oracle Solaris,
Oracle Enterprise Linux, Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SUSE
Linux components. The metadata includes
Package/RPM information and dependencies
Patch information and dependencies
Patch compatibilities and withdrawn patches
Download and deployment rules
Oracle Solaris Operating System images
Product update images
Enterprise Controller to KB communication configured as
Connected mode
Disconnected mode
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Enterprise Controller is the central server for Oracle
Enterprise Manager Ops Center. It is a centralized cache of
objects including:
OS images
Firmware images
Plans
Profiles
Policies
Asset information
Packages/RPMs
Patches
Job Histories
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

User Interface
The Enterprise Controller hosts the Web Browser UI (BUI)
Jobs
All jobs are initiated from the Enterprise Controller
Jobs are transferred to a Proxy Controller which manages
the execution
Job logs are stored on the Enterprise Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Connection Mode
When configured in Connected Mode
The Enterprise Controller connects to the KB or vendor sites
via the internet
Downloads Packages/RPMs, Patches, KB updates, product
updates as needed.
Can be configured in Disconnected Mode with no internet
connection between the Enterprise Controller and the KB.
Must manually upload KB information and Packages etc to
the Enterprise Controller.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Proxy Controller
The Proxy Controller provides the connection between the
Enterprise Controller and the Agent Controllers
There must be at least one Proxy Controller
Can be co-located with the Enterprise Controller for small
datacenters
Large or distributed datacenters configure multiple Proxy
Controllers
Performs the OS provisioning on an asset
Manages and Monitors the System (Service Processor)
assets
Transfers jobs to the Agent Controller on the OS assets for
execution
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Co-located Proxy Controller

Refer to:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/Architecture#Architecture-
ProxyController
Co-located Proxy Controller
A Co-Located Proxy Controller is configured on the same
server as the Enterprise Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Multiple Proxy Controllers
Multiple Proxy Controllers would be configured if:
Data center has a large number of assets to manage
Data center is spread over multiple locations
Large number of jobs to be run concurrently
Firewall infrastructure between assets and Enterprise
Controller
Multiple subnets and OS Provisioning by Enterprise
Manager Ops Center is needed
Multiple Proxy Controllers also reduce the bandwidth
consumption of asset management in remote locations
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Multiple Proxy Controllers

Multiple Subnets
This diagram shows an Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center configuration with two
proxy Controllers each managing assets on separate subnets.
Management subnet for the Service Processors
Data subnet for the Operating System Agents
Refer to:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/Architecture#Architecture-
ProxyController
Multiple Proxy Controllers
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Agent Controller
An Agent Controller, or Agent, is the lightweight software
installed on the managed Operating System asset.
It is responsible for:
OS Monitoring
OS Updates
Installed during an OS asset discovery and management.
All communication between the Enterprise Controller and
the Agent Controller is via a Proxy Controller.
Manages the virtual machines on virtualization hosts
Oracle Solaris Containers (Global Zone)
Oracle VM Server for SPARC (Control Domain)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Communication Methods: Connected Mode

Connected mode is when the Enterprise Controller has an active connection to the internet. It
will download information from the Knowledge Base, product updates, OS images, firmware
and OS updates as required.
The Enterprise Controller can also upload data to a My Oracle Support (MOS) account.
Web Proxy
It is possible to configure a web proxy server between the Enterprise Controller and the
Internet if required.
Communication Methods
Connected Mode
Enterprise
Controller
Proxy
Controller
Proxy
Controller
Proxy
Controller
Agent
Controller
Agent
Controller
Agent
Controller
Knowledge
Base
Internet Boundary
Browser User Interface
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Communication Methods: Disconnected Mode

Disconnected mode is when the Enterprise Controller is isolated from the internet. Information
from the Knowledge Base must be downloaded manually from a separate system with an
active internet connection.
The harvester script
The harvester script is run on an internet connected machine to manually download the
metadata and patches from the Knowledge Base and the resulting harvester bundle is
transferred to the Enterprise Controller server and through the BUI, is uploaded to the
Enterprise Controller.
Packages, Patches, RPMs, can be uploaded to the Enterprise Controller via a Bulk Upload
process as well.
Disconnected Mode
Enterprise
Controller
Proxy
Controller
Proxy
Controller
Proxy
Controller
Agent
Controller
Agent
Controller
Agent
Controller
Internet Boundary
Browser User Interface
Knowledge
Base
Harvester
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Networking Principles
Use standard Web protocols when possible
Easier integration into existing networks and firewalls
Simplified configuration of network devices
Use Pull communication where possible
Proxy Controller will pull job details from the Enterprise
Controller queues
Agent Controller will pull job details from the Proxy
Controller queues
Improves scalability and reduces server load
Job status pushed asynchronously back to Enterprise
Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Communication Methods: Ports, Protocols and Connections

Refer to:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/Network+Port+Requirements+
and+Protocols#NetworkPortRequirementsandProtocols-
NetworkRequirementsandDataFlow
Ports, Protocols and Connections
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Communication Methods: Ports and Protocols

Refer to:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/Network+Port+Requirements+
and+Protocols#NetworkPortRequirementsandProtocols-
ListofPortsandProtocols
Ports and Protocols
Communication Protocol and Port Purpose
Browser to Enterprise
Controller
HTTPS, TCP 9443 Web interface
Browser to Enterprise
Controller
HTTP, TCP 80 Redirects to port 9443
Proxy Controller to
HTTPS, TCP 443
Proxy Controller pushes
asset data to EC.
Proxy Controller pulls data
for jobs, updates, agents,
and OS images.
Proxy Controller to Targets
FTP, TCP 21
SSH, TCP 22
Telnet, TCP 23
DHCP, UDP 67,68
SNMP, UDP 161,162
IPMI, TCP+UDP 623
Service Tags, TCP 6481
ICMP ping, no port
Discovery, bare-metal
provisioning, management,
and monitoring. For ICMP,
proxy controllers send an
echo request ping and
receive either an echo
reply ping or destination
unreachable.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Ports and Protocols
Agent to Proxy Controller HTTPS, TCP 21165
Agents push of asset data
to Proxy Controller.
Agents pull data for jobs.
Agent to Proxy Controller HTTPS, TCP 8002
Agents pull updates from
Proxy Controller.
OS to Proxy Controller HTTPS, TCP 8004
OS provisioning job's
completion status
Linux OS provisioning
Download of the agent
archive file.
Upload of the status
messages about failed
agent installations
Java client to public APIs
Transport Layer
Security(TLS) Port 11172
JMX access from clients
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Ports and Protocols
WMI to agent Port 11162
Communication to agent
on Windows targets
Proxy Controller to NFS
server
Port 2049 (default)
See operating system
documentation for
configuring NFS
Proxy Controller pulls
provisioning images.
Enterprise Controller Port 8005
Enterprise Controller in
Disconnected mode
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Communication Methods: Subscription Model

Most communication is via a Pull method, where the lower level subscribes to a syndicated
subscription model based on Atom feeds. The lower level polls the subscribed feeds and if a
job is available, it pulls the details and processes it.
On the Enterprise Controller, there are job queues for each of the Proxy Controllers to which
the Proxy Controllers subscribe.
On each Proxy Controller, there are job queues for each of the Agent Controllers to which the
Agent Controllers subscribe.
Refer to:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Atom_%28standard%29
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/java/javase/tech/javamanagemen
t-140525.html
Subscription Model
Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses a subscription model to
communicate between tiers
Based on atom feeds
Agent Controller subscribes to a message feed from the
Proxy Controller
Proxy Controller subscribes to a message feed from the
Message communication based on the Java Management
Extensions (JMX) API
Status updates propagated asynchronous up to the
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Jobs
Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses Jobs to initiate
management activity
Jobs are initiated on the Enterprise Controller
Job data is queued in a Proxy Controllers Job queue on
the Enterprise Controller
Proxy Controller pulls the Job data from the Enterprise
Controller and is queued in an Agent Controllers Job
queue on the Proxy Controller
Agent Controller pulls the Job data from the Proxy
Controller and the tasks making up the Job are executed
Job status is propagated back to the Enterprise Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Communication Methods: Aggregated Data Model

To build up a complete aggregated data model on the Enterprise Controller, each tier
propagates its view of the data to the tier above.
Agent Controller
Has a view of the OS asset it is managing
All data about the asset that the Agent Controller has, is propagated up to its
corresponding Proxy Controller
Proxy Controller
Has a view of all the System assets it is managing
Combines that data with the data that was propagated up from each of the Agent
Controllers it is managing
All data that the Proxy Controller has, is propagated up to the Enterprise Controller
Combines all data that was propagated up from each of the Proxy Controllers it is
managing
Stores this complete aggregated view of all data in the Database on the Enterprise
Controller
Aggregated Data Model
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Technologies: Assets

There are two main types of assets. A System asset, and an Operating System asset.
System Asset
This is created when a Service Processor is discovered and managed.
- ILOM
- ALOM
- ELOM
- XSCF
- RSC
- Other IPMI Service Processor
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Technologies
Assets
Enterprise Manager Ops Center manages two main types of
assets
System Assets
Represents the system hardware
Normally references a service processor
Operating System Assets
Represents the Operating system running on the System
Manages both physical and virtual OS instances
Also manages
Chassis
ZFS Storage Appliance
10 GB Ethernet Switches
QDR Infiniband Switches
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Technologies: Assets (continued)

Operating System Asset
This is created when a Operating System is discovered and managed.
- Oracle Solaris
- Oracle Enterprise Linux
- Red Hat Enterprise Linux (RHEL)
- Novel SUSE Linux Enterprise Server (SLES)
- Microsoft Windows
Connected to the System corresponding System Asset and displayed is the asset
hierarchy.
When a Virtualized Operating System Asset id discovered (Solaris Zone, or Oracle
Virtual Machine for SPARC Guest Domain), it is connected to the corresponding global
zone, or Control Domain OS asset in the asset hierarchy.
When an Operating System asset is discovered without a corresponding System Asset,
an OS generated System Asset is created.
Other Assets Types
Chassis Assets are created for Sun Blade 6000 and Sun Blade 8000 chassis.
- Chassis Assets contain the System Asset and Operating System Asset of each of
the Blades in the chassis
ZFS Storage Appliance Assets are made available to the Storage Library functionality
- Sun Storage 7x10 Unified Storage System
- Sun ZFS Storage Appliance 7x20
Switches
- Sun Blade 6000 Ethernet Switched NEM 24p
- Sun Network 10gE Switch 72p
- Sun Datacenter Infiniband QDR Switch 36
- Sun Network QDR InfiniBand Gateway Switch
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Technolgies
Protocols
Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses different protocols to talk
to different assets
SSH to communicated with Solaris and Linux OS Assets,
and some Service Processors
Telnet to communicate with some Service Processors
IPMI to communicated with some Service Processors
WMI to communicate with MS Windows OS Assets
JMX to communicate with Oracle Solaris Cluster nodes
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Integration with Grid Control

You can link the monitoring functionality of both products. Even though both products can
monitor operating system status, they will not share overlapping information.
The OS status and alerts from one application will not display in the other application's
user interface
The OS monitoring parameters specific to Oracle Solaris Zones and Oracle VM Server
for SPARC will appear in Enterprise Manager Grid Control.
You can install Enterprise Manager Ops Center and Grid Control in your data center and
then configure the applications to communicate with each other.
You can install Enterprise Manager Ops Center and Grid Control in your data center and then
configure the applications to communicate with each other.
An Enterprise Manager Grid Control user or DB user on the Oracle Enterprise Manager Grid
Control repository with select permissions for the management repository and Enterprise
Configuration Management views is needed.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Integration with
Grid Control
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center and Oracle Enterprise
Manager Grid Control are complementary technologies that are
designed to provide an enterprise-level data center
management solution for all levels
Oracle Enterprise Manager Grid
Control manages the applications,
middleware, databases, and
operating systems at the top of the
stack
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops
Center manages operating systems,
virtual machines, servers, and
storage devices in the lower half of
the stack
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Integration with Grid Control (continued)

To display basic application, middleware, and database monitoring information for a target in
Enterprise Manager Ops Center, configure the Enterprise Controller to communicate with the
Enterprise Manager Grid Control repository. The monitoring information appears in the
Targets tab in the Asset view. Click a target to view basic information. To view more details,
double-click the problem and launch the target home page in Enterprise Manager Grid
Control.
To display information collected by Enterprise Manager Ops Center in the Enterprise Manager
Grid Control console, you must install and configure a plug-in application. The plug-in creates
a new Infrastructure Stack target type in the console. Select Infrastructure Stack targets to
display information collected by Enterprise Manager Ops Center. To get more details about
the problem, you can drill down into the Enterprise Manager Ops Center UI.
See
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EMOC11g1/Enterprise+Manager+Grid+Contro
l+Access
for information about configuring the Enterprise Controller to communicate with the Enterprise
Manager Grid Control repository.
See the "System Monitoring Plug-in Installation Guide for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops
Center 11g Release 11.1.0.0" for the steps to install the plug-in software.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle System Monitoring Plug-In

The Infrastructure Stack Plug-in for Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center extends Oracle
Enterprise Manager Grid Control monitoring features with additional infrastructure layers
below the operating system, including the following:
Virtual assets, including Oracle Solaris Zones and Oracle Solaris VM Server for SPARC
domains and guests
Service processors
Server containers (chassis)
Sun Oracle SPARC Enterprise M3000/M4000/M5000/M8000/M9000 Server domains
When you configure the Enterprise Manager Ops Center and Grid Control applications to
work together, each application shares information with the other application.
Each user interfaces includes information from the other application. Resources managed by
Enterprise Manager Ops Center are visible on the Grid Control user interface and resources
managed by Enterprise Manager Grid Control are visible on the Enterprise Manager Ops
Center user interface. Alerts generated in one application are reported in the other
application.
Oracle System Monitoring Plug-In
The Oracle System Monitoring Plug-In integrates Enterprise
Manager Ops Center and Grid Control to allow monitoring
information collected by Enterprise Manager Ops Center to be
displayed in the Grid Control user interface.
A new Infrastructure Stack Target created on the Grid
Control console
Select this Target to display monitoring information
gathered by Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Drill down to access the Enterprise Manager Ops Center
BUI to get additional information
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Oracle System Monitoring Plug-In (continued)

Installation information including
Software Requirements
User Requirements
Configuring the Management Agent
Setting Credentials
Deploying the Plug-in
Adding Infrastructure Stack targets
Configuring the Ops Center software
Are instructions on viewing information are given in the product documentation at:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/System+Monitoring+Plug-
in+Installation+Guide+for+Oracle+Enterprise+Manager+Ops+Center+11g+R
elease+11.1.0.0
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: b
Quiz
The centralized cache of OS Images, Firmware Images, Plans,
and Profiles are stored on which layer of Enterprise Manager
Ops Center?
a. Knowledge Base
b. Enterprise Controller
c. Proxy Controller
d. Agent Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
A co-located Proxy Controller is when you install and configure
on the same machine:
a. The Proxy Controller and the Enterprise Controller
b. The Proxy Controller and an Agent Controller
c. The Proxy Controller and the Knowledge Base
d. The Proxy Controller and Enterprise Manager Grid Control
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: b
Quiz
True or False: An Enterprise Manager Ops Center agent
controller is installed on both the OS Asset and the System
Asset?
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: If the Enterprise Controller is configured in
disconnected mode, the Knowledge Base must be downloaded
from an Internet connected machine using the harvester script.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Summary
Describe Enterprise Manager Ops Center architecture
Identify communication methods in Enterprise Manager
Ops Center
Describe Enterprise Manager Ops Center technologies
Understand Enterprise Manager Ops Center integration
with Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g
Describe the Oracle System Monitoring Plug-in for Oracle
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Practice 2 Overview:
Verifying Access to the RLDC
This practice covers the following topics:
Logging in to the Remote Lab Data Center to verify access
to lab equipment
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Installing and Configuring Oracle Enterprise
Manager Ops Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Objectives
List system requirements for Enterprise Manager Ops Center
installation
Understand Enterprise Manager Ops Center configuration
options
Prepare for Enterprise Manager Ops Center installation
Describe Enterprise Manager Ops Center High Availability
configurations for Solaris and Linux
Perform a basic Enterprise Manager Ops Center installation
Perform post installation software validation
Deploy proxies manually and using the Proxy Deployment
wizard
Uninstall Enterprise Manager Ops Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Installation Overview
Installing Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center involves the following main steps:
Reviewing system requirements
- Before you install the software, you must determine what systems to use to
establish your Enterprise Manager Ops Center infrastructure, including an
Enterprise Controller and one or more Proxy Controllers. To do this, you will need
to evaluate your planned uses for the software, and determine from that evaluation
what types of systems and how many systems to employ in these roles.
Preparing systems for installation
- Once you know what systems your Enterprise Manager Ops Center
implementation will require as Enterprise and Proxy Controllers, you must prepare
them for use by installing their operating systems and configuring their system
resources to support their functional roles in Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Installing Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center typically
follows these main steps:
Reviewing system requirements
Preparing systems for installation
Configuring for High Availability (optional)
Installing and configuring the Ops Center software
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Installation Overview (continued)

Implementing a High Availability (HA) configuration (optional)
- You can optionally create a configuration that supports transferring Enterprise
Manager Ops Center resources from your active Enterprise Controller to a standby
Enterprise Controller in case the active Enterprise Controller fails.
Installing and configuring the Enterprise Manager Ops Center software
- With the required systems in place and prepared, you install Enterprise Manager
Ops Center software on your Enterprise Controller system, deploy Proxy
controllers as needed, and begin discovering and managing assets.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
System Requirements: Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controller

You can install Enterprise Manager Ops Center Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controller
software on a variety of systems and operating systems.
Systems that you choose to use as your Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controllers
must meet the minimum recommended resource specifications described in this slide.
You can install Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controller software on systems running
the listed versions of Oracle Solaris, Oracle Enterprise Linux, or Red Hat Enterprise
Linux.
- Solaris installations require either the SUNWCall or SUNWCXall software group.
- Specific minimum patch levels are required for Solaris 10 11/06, and earlier.
- Do not minimize or harden the Solaris OS until after Enterprise Manager Ops
Center installation.
- Linux installations require installing all optional software components in every
software category except the Language category.
- For Linux installations, set the SELinux security setting to disabled before
installing Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
System Requirements:
Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controller
Component Recommended Value
Operating System Release Oracle Solaris 10: 11/06 and later (x86 or SPARC)
Oracle Enterprise Linux: 5.3 or 5.5
RHEL 5.0, 5.3 or 5.5 (AS, ES, or WS)
Disk Space 2 GBytes of free space in /opt and /var/tmp
72 GBytes of space in /var/opt/sun/xvm
System Memory (RAM) 6 GB for Enterprise Controller
4 GB for Proxy Controller
Swap Space Configured 6 Gbytes for Enterprise Controller
4 Gbytes for Proxy Controller
Processor AMD Opteron and Intel Xeon: 2 sockets
UltraSPARCT1/T2: 1 socket; 2 or more cores
UltraSPARC IV+/IV: 2 sockets
UltraSPARC IIIi: 2 sockets
Networking At least one Network Interface Card (NIC)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
System Requirements: Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controller (continued)

Disk space requirements are subject to a number of considerations.
2 GBytes of space are required to store Enterprise Manager Ops Center software that
installs below the /opt directory.
The install script and OCDoctor.sh script both check for 72Gbytes of space below
the /var/opt/sun/xvm directory, and provide warnings if less space exists.
Although the Enterprise Controller cache for update data uses space below the
/var/opt/sun/xvm directory, you can create storage libraries on file systems, local
or NFS-attached, other than the file system that holds /var/opt/sun/xvm.
Ops center creates symbolic links in structures below the /var/opt/sun/xvm
directory that point to the EC local library content that resides in other directories or file
systems.
Proxy Controllers still copy and cache data to directories in
/var/opt/sun/xvm/proxyImageCache.
For each OS type that you intend to update, about 10 GBytes of space is required for
the updates cache below the /var/opt/sun/xvm directory on the Enterprise
Controller.
Plan for about 4 GBytes of space for each OS image used to support OS provisioning.
You can place these images in EC local libraries that exist outside of the
/var/opt/sun/xvm directory.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
System Requirements: Using the OCDoctor.sh Script

The OCDoctor.sh script performs a number of checks, including looking for:
Sufficient memory , configured swap space, available disk space
Correct operating system software group and revision
Existing or conflicting cacao instances
Required packages and patches
Conflicting packages
Correct umask value
Required network ports either available or in use
Required online SMF services
The OCDoctor.sh script is located in the /var/opt/sun/xvm/OCDoctor directory on
the Enterprise Controller after you run the install script.
System Requirements:
Using the OCDoctor.sh Script
The OCDoctor.sh script performs system checks that
you can use to:
Check if your system resources and configuration are
sufficient to install Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Gather troubleshooting information after you install
To run a pre-installation check, use the command:
# OCDoctor.sh --sat-prereq
You can download this script from this location:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/OC+Doct
or
The OCDoctor.sh script is updated routinely
The --update option downloads the latest version
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Ops Center Configuration Options: Example Configuration

The diagram in this slide represents many of the connections and system relationships that
you can configure in Enterprise Manager Ops Center, and lists the ports the software uses to
communicate.
This example configuration incorporates multiple Proxy Controllers, includes support for
virtualized systems, and includes connectivity to the Oracle knowledge base.
Each component in this diagram implies a set of decisions that you might need to make about
your Enterprise Manager Ops Center implementation. For example:
Identifying a network topology that supports your anticipated OS provisioning and OS
updates network load
Running the software in either Connected or Disconnected mode, relative to the web-
accessible Oracle knowledge base
Determining the number of Proxy Controllers your configuration requires, and their
placement in the network
Determining the number and type of virtualized operating system instances you intend to
support
Designating NFS or Fibre-Channel based storage resources to use as shared storage
libraries; in this example to support virtualized OS instances
Ops Center Configuration Options
Example Configuration
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Configuration Options: Configuration Wizard

The first time that you log in to Enterprise Manager Ops Center after installing the software,
the Configuration wizard runs automatically. The Configuration wizard requires the root login
to perform the initial configuration. Establishing an alternative administrative user
subsequently denies logins using the root account.
Using the Configuration wizard, you can configure the all of the basic Enterprise Manager Ops
Center options, including:
Specifying an alternative Enterprise Manager Ops Center administrative user, and
setting internet proxy configuration details
Running service-tag based discovery to discover hardware and operating systems, and
subsequently manage the discovered assets
Registering your Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance with the Oracle Data Center
Configuring Enterprise Manager Ops Center to run in Connected mode or Disconnected
mode, relative to online updates
Creating Enterprise-Controller based storage libraries, either on the local file system or
as NFS-based shared directories
Configuring the OS provisioning service by establishing basic DHCP services
Configuration Options
Configuration Wizard
After you install the software on your Enterprise Controller, you
use the Configuration wizard to establish your initial Enterprise
Manager Ops Center configuration
Running the Configuration wizard requires logging in to
Ops Center as the privileged user on your Enterprise
Controller
The Configuration wizard allows you specify a non-root
user to administer Enterprise Manager Ops Center
For most options, you can either specify a configuration
using the Configuration wizard, or choose to configure the
option later
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preparing a System for Installation: Accessing Software and Documentation

You must accept the Oracle Technology Network License Agreement before you can
download Enterprise Manager Ops Center Software. Select the Enterprise Controller
installation archive that is appropriate for the operating system on your system. The
Enterprise Controller archive contains all components required for Enterprise Controller and
Proxy Controller installation.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center documentation is available both in HTML and PDF format.
The following publications contain information that is useful for planning and implementing an
Enterprise Manager Ops Center configuration:
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Site Preparation Guide
- https://wikis.sun.com/download/attachments/217724330/E18418-01.pdf
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Installation Guide for Solaris Operating System
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Installation Guide for Linux Operating Systems
Preparing for Installation
Accessing Software and Documentation
You can download Enterprise Manager Ops Center software from
the Oracle Technology Network, and access documentation
online
Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center 11g Release 1
software download:
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/oem/ops-center/oem-ops-center-
188778.html
The Enterprise Controller installation archive is about 2.4 GBytes in
size
Documentation resources:
Online documentation:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/Home
Documentation in PDF format:
http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E11857_01/nav/management.
htm
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preparing for Installation: Preparing an Oracle Solaris System

Installing Oracle Solaris 10, 11/06 or later
Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires a full installation of Oracle Solaris 10, revision 11/06
or later. Either the Entire Distribution (SUNWCall) or Entire Distribution with OEM Support
(SUNWCXall) software groups support Ops Center installation.
Do not minimize or harden the operating system until after you install the product software. If
your OS at one time included SUNWjass hardening, the product software installation might
fail.
Oracle Solaris 10 11/06 requires specific patch levels, described here:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/Requirements+for+Solaris+OS+Installation
Configuring sufficient disk space
Typically you would allocate disk space and swap space to specific file systems or disk
partitions as part of the operating system installation process. Depending on the storage
assets attached to your Enterprise Controller system, you might have the opportunity to
configure additional disk space after the OS is installed.
Preparing an Oracle Solaris System
Preparing an Oracle Solaris system for use as an Enterprise
Controller involves these main actions:
Installing the Oracle Solaris 10 operating system
Install the Entire Distribution or Entire Distribution with OEM
Support software group
2 GBytes free in /opt
72 GBytes free in /var/opt/sun/xvm
6 GBytes of configured swap space
Verifying and configuring additional system resources
Check or configure the list of system resources described in the
Enterprise Manager Ops Center preparation documentation
Use OCDoctor.sh to perform checks
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preparing for Installation: Preparing an Oracle Solaris System (continued)

Although the Enterprise Manager Ops Center install and OCDoctor.sh scripts check for
72 GBytes of available space below /var/opt/sun/xvm, you can configure additional local
or NFS-based storage to hold Enterprise Controller cache data. These storage resources can
attach outside of the /var/opt/sun/xvm directory structure.
Considering storage for an HA configuration also influences decisions that you make about
storage resources for Enterprise Manager Ops Center. You must configure storage to support
an HA configuration before you install Enterprise Manager Ops Center software.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires specific system resources, some of which might
require manual configuration. The OCDoctor.sh script checks for all of these resources,
and reports any issue that it finds. Typically you would manually correct any issue identified
by the OCDoctor.sh script before you install Enterprise Manager Ops Center software.
System resources that might require manual configuration include:
Creating an alternate administrative user
Configuring the /usr/local directory so that it is writeable
Setting the correct date and time
Removing the SMClintl package
Configuring network services to provide access to all required web sites
Resolving network port configuration conflicts
Setting the correct umask value
Note that it is possible to install the Enterprise Controller in a whole-root non-global zone. You
must not enable the co-located Proxy Controller in the non-global zone. You cannot install a
Proxy Controller or Agent software on the global zone that supports non-global zone where
the Enterprise Controller is installed.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preparing for Installation: Preparing a Linux System

Installing the operating system
For Linux-based installations, Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires that you install all
software packages, except those for languages, that the Linux installer is able to install from
the installation media.
In the Linux installer, each software category contains multiple specific software groups. At
the appropriate point in the Linux installer, for every software group in every software category
except Languages, perform the following:
Right-click the software group to display the list of installation options
Select the Select all optional packages option
Verify that the number of optional packages selected matches the number of possible
packages
You must set the SELinux status to disabled in order to install Enterprise Manager Ops
Center.
Preparing a Linux System
Preparing a Linux system for use as an Enterprise Controller
involves these main actions:
Installing the operating system
Install all optional software components in every software
category, except the Language category
2 GBytes free in /opt
72 GBytes free in /var/opt/sun/xvm
6 GBytes of configured swap space
Check or configure the list of system resources described in the
Enterprise Manager Ops Center preparation documentation
Use OCDoctor.sh to perform checks
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Preparing for Installation: Preparing a Linux System (continued)

Like with Solaris systems, you would typically allocate disk space and swap space to specific
file systems or disk partitions as part of the operating system installation process. Options
exist for adding storage assets after installing the operating system.
Considering storage for an HA configuration also influences decisions that you make about
storage resources for Enterprise Manager Ops Center. You must configure storage to support
an HA configuration before you install Enterprise Manager Ops Center software.
As with Solaris-based installations, Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires specific Linux
system resources, some of which might require manual configuration.
Use the OCDoctor.sh script to check for these resources, and correct any issue it identifies
before you install Enterprise Manager Ops Center software.
System resources that might require manual configuration include:
Creating an alternate administrative user
Configuring the /usr/local directory so that it is writeable
Setting the correct date and time
Setting SELinux status to disabled.
Configuring network services to provide access to all required web sites
Resolving network port configuration conflicts
Setting correct kernel.shmall and kernel.shmmax values
Setting the correct umask value
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center HA Configuration: HA Overview

Establishing an HA configuration for Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires two identical
systems, and storage that you can readily move between the two systems.
The two systems must be of the same processor class, and must have:
The identical version of Enterprise Manager Ops Center software installed, including
patches
Identical network interfaces and network connections
Identical Operating system installed
If the primary Enterprise Controller fails, you perform a set of tasks to move the storage to the
secondary Enterprise Controller, and configure that system to assume the identity and
function of the failed primary Enterprise Controller.
You must configure the main Enterprise Manager Ops Center data repository, the
/var/opt/sun/xvm directory structure, to reside on the transferable storage resource
before you install the Enterprise Manager Ops Center software.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center HA Configuration
HA Overview
You can create an optional high availability configuration that
allows you to transfer Enterprise Manager Ops Center
resources from an active Enterprise Controller to a standby
High availability (HA) applies only to the Enterprise
Controller and its co-located Proxy Controller
Creating an HA configuration requires the following:
Two systems of the same processor class, operating system,
Enterprise Manager Ops Center version, and with identical network
interfaces and connections
Storage to hold specific Enterprise Manager Ops Center data
structures that you can transfer between two systems
One system acts as the active Enterprise Controller, and
the other remains installed but unconfigured until employed
in a failover scenario
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center HA Configuration: HA Overview (continued)

Many different types of storage resources can support an HA configuration for Enterprise
Manager Ops Center. Storage that you use in an HA configuration must meet these
requirements:
Storage must offer data redundancy capability, such as mirroring or RAID 5.
Storage must be transferable between the primary and secondary Enterprise Controller
systems.
Storage must offer performance that is sufficient to support operations.
Storage must have the capacity to hold the data that the Enterprise Manager Ops
Center software stores in the /var/opt/sun/xvm directory structure.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center HA Configuration: Failover Overview

The specific steps that are required to perform HA failover for Enterprise Manager Ops Center
largely depend on the specific configuration of the systems and storage resources you use. If
you establish an HA configuration, it will be important to create and test a set of failover
procedures that meet the needs of your own configuration.
In general, HA failover requires these main steps:
Shutting Down the Primary Enterprise Controller
If possible, shut down the primary Enterprise Controller in an orderly manner. This includes:
Running the habackup program if possible. A cron job runs the habackup program
every hour on the primary Enterprise Controller.
Shutting down Enterprise Manager Ops Center services,
Releasing control of the storage asset that holds the /var/opt/sun/xvm directory
structure.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center HA Configuration
Failover Overview
If an issue arises on the primary Enterprise Controller, you can
substitute the secondary Enterprise Controller by following
these main steps:
Shut down the primary Enterprise Controller
Prepare the secondary Enterprise Controller for failover
Transfer the storage asset that holds
/var/opt/sun/xvm to the secondary Enterprise
Controller
Run the harestore program to configure the secondary
Reboot the secondary Enterprise Controller and start
Enterprise Manager Ops Center operations
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center HA Configuration: Failover Overview (continued)

Preparing the Secondary Enterprise Controller for Failover
With Enterprise Manager Ops Center installed on the secondary Enterprise Controller, you
need to:
Shut down Enterprise Manager Ops Center services
Unmount LOFS mounts and unshare the
/var/opt/sun/xvm/osp/share/allstart directory
Create a new, empty /var/opt/sun/xvm directory
Transferring the Storage Asset
The procedures required to transfer your storage asset to the secondary Enterprise controller
depend on they type of storage you employ, and how that storage attaches to the Enterprise
Controller.
Running the harestore program to Configure the Secondary Enterprise Controller
The harestore program uses data saved by the habackup program to re-create the Ops
Center configuration from the primary Enterprise Controller on the secondary Enterprise
Controller.
Rebooting and Starting Ops Center Operations
The harestore program causes the secondary Enterprise Controller to assume the
network identity of the primary Enterprise Controller. For this reason, it is important to allow
only one of these two systems to run while they are connected to the same network.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Installation Overview

This section provides an overview of the Enterprise Manager Ops Center installation and
configuration process, and describes the main panels that the Configuration wizard presents.
Expanding the Installation Archive and Installing the Software
The installation archive used for this course is named enterprise-
controller.SunOS.i386.11.1.0.1536.tar.gz.
Typically you expand the installation archive into a temporary directory on your system. This
makes an installation script available that you use to initially install the software.
Using the Configuration Wizard
The Configuration wizard presents different panels depending on selections that you make.
Some selections determine if you will configure options while using the wizard, or after the
wizard completes.
Performing an Installation
Installing Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires two main
steps
Expanding the installation archive and installing the
software
Ops Center software is delivered using a compressed tar
archive
Logging in to Ops Center for the first time, and using the
Configuration wizard to establish an operational Ops
Center configuration
The Configuration wizard starts automatically when you log
in to Ops Center for the first time
Configuration options range from simple to complex
You can deploy a co-located Proxy Controller or remote
Proxy Controllers
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Beginning the Installation

Expand the installation archive into a temporary directory on your system, and run the
install script to begin the installation process.
The install script asks for an email address to use for security notifications, and My Oracle
Support credentials to allow security updates to appear on youre my Oracle Support page.
Installation will continue both if you enter or do not enter these values.
Beginning the Installation
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: System Requirements Checks

The install script includes checks for required system resources in one of its initial steps.
In this example, the install script identified two issues; insufficient disk space and
insufficient memory installed.
Typically you would choose to exit the install script, and correct the identified issues
before running the script again.
You can continue past these warnings, but depending on the specific issue, the install
script might not complete successfully, or you might not be able to successfully configure your
Enterprise Manager Ops Center software.
The Configuration wizard also reports the issues that the install script identifies.
You can use the installation log kept in /var/tmp/installer.log.latest to help
troubleshoot installation issues.
System Requirements Checks
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: install Script Progress

The install script shows the list of tasks that it performs, and updates it as the installation
proceeds.
This installation process takes about 20 minutes, depending on the speed of your system.
install Script Progress
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Installation Complete

When the install script finishes, it provides a URL to use to connect to the Enterprise
Manager Ops Center browser user interface and run the Configuration wizard.
Installation Complete
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Logging In to Enterprise Manager Ops Center

Connecting to the http://<Enterprise Controller> URL automatically redirects to a
secure HTTP port.
The Enterprise Manager Ops Center browser user interface (BUI) requests your Enterprise
Controller root or privileged user login credentials.
Typically you would use privileged user credentials only for this first interaction with the
Enterprise Manager Ops Center BUI and Configuration wizard.
You can establish an alternative administrative user in the Configuration wizard to use for
continuing Enterprise Manager Ops Center operations. If you establish an alternative
administrative user, Enterprise Manager Ops Center denies subsequent root user logins.
Logging In to Enterprise Manager Ops Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Introduction Panel

The Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Configuration wizard guides you through the
steps required to configure your Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance.
The Configuration wizard presents panels that either simply provide information, or that offer
selections or fields that allow you to configure your Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance.
The Introduction panel simply provides information. This lesson will focus on the panels that
require input, and will omit those panels that only provide information. Read the informational
panels as they display in the Configuration wizard.
In general, you advance through the Configuration wizard by clicking Next.
Depending on selections that you make in the Configuration wizard, different sets of panels
display. This lesson provides an overview of all of the main configuration panels in the
Configuration wizard.
After this panel, the Configuration wizard displays an information panels that describes
Enterprise Manager Ops Center terminology.
Introduction Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Configuration Panel

The Configuration panel enables you to describe your Enterprise Controller, specify an
alternative administrative user, and specify HTTP proxy details.
Provide the following identifying information:
Name The name for the Enterprise Controller to display in the Enterprise Manager
Ops Center BUI
Description Optional description
Hostname The host name of the Enterprise Controller
To Specify an alternative administrative user, check the Use an alternative user check
box, and provide the user name and password. This user must already exist on the Enterprise
Controller.
If your Enterprise Controller uses a proxy to access the Internet, provide the server, port, and
authentication information as necessary.
After this panel, the Configuration wizard displays two information panels that describe
deployment scenarios.
Configuration Panel
Check to specify
an alternative
administrative user
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Choose Deployment Panel

In the Choose Deployment panel you to choose how you want to deploy Proxy Controllers for
your Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance.
Select the A simple deployment option if you want to make the Proxy Controller that is co-
located on the Enterprise Controller operational. This does not prevent configuring additional
Proxy Controllers later, outside of the Configuration wizard.
Select the An advanced deployment option if you have prepared one or more systems
other than the Enterprise Controller to function as a Proxy Controller. This option enables you
to deploy multiple remote Proxy Controllers, and does not configure the co-located Proxy
Controller.
Select the last option if you want to deploy Proxy Controllers after the Configuration wizard
completes.
Keep in mind that Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires at least one operational Proxy
Controller.
Choose Deployment Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Configuring the Local Proxy Controller

If you select simple deployment, the Configuration wizard automatically deploys the co-
located Proxy Controller.
In other parts of the Configuration wizard, panels similar to this one show the progress of
other processes as they run.
Configuring the Local Proxy Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Proxy Controllers Panel

The Configuration wizard displays this panel if you choose an advanced deployment.
Select Deploy Automatically to use the Configuration wizard to deploy remote Proxy
Controllers.
Select Deploy Manually to manually deploy Proxy Controllers, outside of the Configuration
wizard, before you continue.
Proxy Controllers Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Remote Proxy Controllers Panel

If you choose to deploy Proxy Controllers automatically, the Configuration wizard displays the
Remote Proxy Controllers panel.
Here you identify and provide login credentials for the remote Proxy Controllers that you want
to deploy. For each remote Proxy Controller, provide the following information:
Hostname/IP The host name or IP address of the target system on your network
SSH User User name to access the remote system via SSH. If this is a privileged
user, no privileged role information is required.
SSH Password Password for the SSH User
Privileged Role Privileged user or role name needed only if SSH denies privileged
user access
Role Password Password for privileged user or role
Tunnel Creates a reversed SSH tunnel to the Proxy Controller target system
Port - Port on the Enterprise Controller to use for the tunnel
The Configuration wizard requires that you specify information for at least one Proxy
Controller before you can proceed.
Remote Proxy Controllers Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Proxy Controller Status Panel

The Configuration wizard shows the status of proxies that you deploy, for both simple and
advanced deployments.
Proxies that you deploy should show an ONLINE state when the deployment completes.
Typically you need to click Refresh to see the current state of the Proxy Controller.
Proxy Controller Status Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Discovering and Managing Systems Panel

The Discover and Manage panel follows the Proxy Controller deployment panels in the
Configuration wizard.
Choose one of these options:
Discover/manage systems later skips the system discovery and management steps
in the Configuration wizard
Discover/manage systems now performs a service-tag based discovery operation,
and allows you to manage the systems and operating systems that you discover. This
option can take some time if you have many assets to discover on your network.
The Configuration wizard displays the progress of the discovery process.
Discover and Manage Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Discovered Hardware Panel

The Discovered Hardware panel displays if the discovery process discovers hardware. The
Configuration wizard shows the list of discovered hardware, and allows you to manage the
hardware that you select. Discovered hardware includes the service processors of the
systems on your network.
Typically you would choose to at least manage the hardware of the systems whose operating
systems you also intend to manage in the following steps.
Discovered Hardware Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Manage Hardware Panel

If you choose hardware to manage, you must specify the login credentials required to access
the hardware.
Choose one of these options for specifying credentials:
Use factory-set credentials attempts to use factory default login credentials to
access the hardware
Use the same credentials - uses the credentials that you specify for all of the
selected hardware
Use individual credentials - allows you to specify credentials for each system
Manage Hardware Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Discovered Operating Systems Panel

The Discovered Operating Systems panel displays if the discovery process discovers
operating systems.
Just like for hardware, select the operating systems that you want to manage.
Discovered Operating Systems Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Manage Operating Systems Panel

You must specify the login credentials required to access the operating systems that you
selected.
Choose one of these options for specifying credentials:
Use the same SSH credentials - Use the same credentials to access all operating
systems
Use individual SSH credentials - Use the credentials that you specify separately for
each operating system
In either case, provide login credentials as follows:
SSH Password - Password for the SSH User
Privileged Role - Privileged user or role name needed only if SSH denies privileged
user access to the operating system
Role Password - Password for privileged user or role
Manage Operating Systems Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Registration Panel

The Registration panel enables you to register your Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance
with the online Oracle Data Center. This panel follows either the Discovery and Management
or Deployment sections of the Configuration wizard, depending on your earlier selections.
Check Register with Oracle Datacenter to enable the Online Account fields.
Provide your My Oracle Support login credentials to register your Enterprise Manager Ops
Center instance.
You must register your Enterprise Manager Ops Center installation with Oracle Datacenter in
order to do any or all of the following:
Upload information about managed assets
View data about Enterprise Manager Ops Center or your managed assets online
Manage service requests through My Oracle Support
Registration Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Services Panel

After the Registration panel, the Configuration wizard provides the opportunity to configure
Enterprise Manager Ops Center services.
Services include:
Configuring for Connected mode or Disconnected mode software updates
Configuring Enterprise Controller storage libraries
Configuring DHCP services to support OS provisioning operations in Enterprise
Manager Ops Center
You can configure services now, or later using the BUI.
Services Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Software Update Service Panel

The Configuration wizard can configure Enterprise Manager Ops Center to run in connected
mode or disconnected mode, or you can configure the connection mode after the
Configuration wizard completes and you log in to Enterprise Manager Ops Center. The
Administration panel in the Enterprise Manager Ops Center BUI allows you to change your
Enterprise Manager Ops Center connection mode.
Configure connected mode Configures Enterprise Manager Ops Center to download
patches and other content from Oracle and other vendors.
Configure disconnected mode Configures Enterprise Manager Ops Center to
operate autonomously, using content that you manually download and supply to the
Enterprise Controller. Configuring for disconnected mode allows you to use Enterprise
Manager Ops Center to perform updates without connecting your Enterprise Controller
to the Internet.
Perform configuration later Use Administration functions to set the connection mode
later. This leaves the Enterprise Controller in a disconnected state.
Software Update Service Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Connected Mode Software Update Panel

If you choose to configure your Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance for connected mode
software updates, the Configuration wizard asks for your My Oracle Support account login
credentials.
Connected Mode Software Update Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Disconnected Mode Software Update Panel

If you choose to configure your Enterprise Manager Ops Center instance for disconnected
mode software updates, the Configuration wizard asks for the path to an update Knowledge
Base bundle that you download using the harvester script.
You run the harvester script from a Solaris system, other than the Enterprise Controller,
that is connected to the Internet. You then transfer the downloaded bundle to the Enterprise
Controller, and configure the Enterprise Controller to run in disconnected mode.
Disconnected Mode Software Update Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Create Storage Library Panel

After the connection mode configuration, you can configure libraries that you would need to
support the provisioning service that you can configure next.
You need to configure a library to store OS images and/or firmware images, which you use to
provision onto systems on your network. The Enterprise Controller uses libraries to cache
content.
Configure library now Allows you to create libraries in subsequent steps
Configure library later Skips creating libraries in the Configuration wizard. You can
create them using Libraries actions in Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Create Storage Library Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Create Storage Library Panel

If you choose to create storage libraries, the Configuration wizard displays the Create Storage
Library panel.
Note that this part of the Configuration wizard enables you to configure software libraries that
are local to the Enterprise Controller. These libraries use directories that are either located
within the Enterprise Controllers local file system, or that the Enterprise Controller can mount
using NFS. You configure NAS or Fibre-Channel based storage libraries in the Ops Center
BUI.
To create a library, provide the following information:
Library Name The name of the library, both in the Enterprise Manager Ops Center
BUI and in the Enterprise Controller file system
Description A brief description of the library or its expected contents. This field is
optional.
Type Choose one of these library types:
- Local Library creates a library on the Enterprise Controller local file system
- NFS Library creates a library based on an NFS share
URL Specify either a file:// or nfs:// URL depending on the type of library you
choose to create. Note that a trailing slash at the end of these URLs is required.
Create Storage Library Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Provisioning Service Panel

Before you can perform OS provisioning operations using Enterprise Manager Ops Center,
you have to enable DHCP services on Proxy Controllers that will carry out OS provisioning.
The Configuration wizard allows you enable DHCP services. Choose one of these options:
Perform configuration now Allows you to configure DHCP services in subsequent
steps
Perform configuration later Skips configuring DHCP services in the Configuration
wizard. You configure DHCP services using Administration actions in Enterprise
Manager Ops Center.
Provisioning Service Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Configure DHCP on Proxy Panel

If you choose to configure the provisioning service now, the Configure DHCP on Proxy panel
enables you to establish basic DHCP services on Proxy Controllers that you select.
For each Proxy Controller that you want to configure, provide the following information:
Proxy Controller Select the Proxy Controller that you want to configure from the
DHCP Server Select either the Solaris or ISC DHCP server. ISC is typically the more
compatible server.
Network Interfaces Select the available interfaces where you want to establish DHCP
services, and click Add to add them to the Selected list.
To configure DHCP services, perform the following steps:
1. Select the proxy controller you wish to configure from the Proxy Controller field
2. Select the DHCP protocol you wish to use (ISC or Solaris) from the DHCP Server field
3. Select one or more network interfaces to use and click Add or Add All to add them to
the list of Selected interfaces
4. Click Configure to configure DHCP services on the selected interfaces
Configure DHCP on Proxy Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Summary Panel

The Summary panel displays at the end of the Configuration wizard.
Click Finish to complete the configuration and log in to Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Click Back to return to previous panels if you want to make changes to your Enterprise
Manager Ops Center configuration.
Summary Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Performing an Installation: Configuration Complete

When the Configuration wizard completes, the Enterprise Manager Ops Center browser user
interface displays.
Configuration Complete
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Installation Validation
The svcs command should list the following online services that depend on the satellite-
enable service:
# svcs -D satellite-enable
STATE STIME FMRI
online 20:50:05 svc:/application/scn/reportdb:default
online 20:50:06 svc:/application/scn/db:default
online 20:50:07 svc:/application/scn/uce-scheduler:default
online 20:50:07 svc:/application/scn/uce-server:default
online 20:50:09 svc:/application/scn/ajaxterm:default
online 20:51:19 svc:/application/management/common-agent-
container-1:oem-ec
online 20:51:24 svc:/application/scn/console:default
The satadm command should report an online status.
Installation Validation
You can check for enabled services and connections to the
Enterprise Controller to validate your installation
Use the svcs command to check for running services that
depend on the svc:/application/scn/satellite-
enable:default service
# svcs -D satellite-enable
Use the satadm command to verify that the Enterprise
Controller is online
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/satadm status
Use the sc-console command to check for Proxy
Controller connections to the Enterprise Controller
# sc-console list-connections
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Installation Validation (continued)

If you have configured the co-located Proxy Controller, the sc-console command should
list an scn-proxy entry:
scn-proxy https://localhost:443 urn:scn:clregid:760f9128-dc8a-
4db5-b09b-5458571df32e:20110204044824125
scn-satellite disconnected
localhost https://localhost:443 urn:scn:clregid:1f29c4e6-4f32-
4264-8f0e-5413fe5d4374:20110204044811151
You can also use the command svcs *scn* *common* to list the status of
Enterprise Manager Ops Center services.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deploying Additional Proxies

You can deploy additional proxies in two ways:
Using the Proxy Deployment wizard in the Enterprise Manager Ops Center BUI
- Select Navigation > Administration > Enterprise Controller
- Select the Proxy Deployment Wizard action
- The proxy deployment wizard presents the same Proxy Controller configuration
options that the Configuration wizard presents.
Manually deploying Proxy Controller software on a target system
- You manually deploy Proxy Controller software only on systems other than the
You can deploy additional Proxy Controllers in two ways:
Using the Proxy Deployment
wizard in the Ops Center BUI
Can configure the co-located
Proxy Controller, or remote
Proxy Controllers
Manually deploying Proxy
Controller software on a target
system
You can download a
separate Proxy Controller
installation archive
Select
Administration
> Enterprise
Controller
Select the
Proxy
Deployment
Wizard action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deploying Additional Proxies: Deploy Proxy Wizard

The Proxy Deployment Wizard action presents the same options for configuring Proxy
Controllers as the Configuration wizard.
Choosing a simple deployment deploys the co-located Proxy Controller
Choosing an advanced deployment allows you to specify how to deploy one or more
remote Proxy Controllers
For an advanced deployment, the same identity and login credentials are required to deploy a
Proxy Controller:
Hostname/IP The host name or IP address of the target system on your network
user access
Create Tunnel Creates a reversed SSH tunnel to the Proxy Controller target system
Port - Port on the Enterprise Controller to use for the tunnel
Deploy Proxy Wizard
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deploying Additional Proxies: Manually Deploying a Proxy Controller

Downloading the Installation Archive
You can download the Proxy Controller installation archive from this location:
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/oem/ops-center/oem-ops-center-188778.html
The Proxy Controller installation archive is named proxy-
controller.SunOS.sparc.11.1.0.1536.tar.gz and it is about 730 MBytes in size.
Expanding the Installation Archive and Running the install Script
To expand the installation archive and run the install script, use the commands:
# gzcat proxy-controller.SunOS.sparc.11.1.0.1536.tar.gz |
tar xf
# cd xvmoc_full_bundle
# ./install -p
Manually Deploying a Proxy Controller
Deploying a Proxy Controller manually requires the following
main steps:
Download the Proxy Controller installation archive and
transfer it to the target system, into a temporary directory
Expand the installation archive, and run the install
script with the p option
Create a temporary file with 400 permission mode to store
the Ops administrator password
Use the proxyadm command to associate the Proxy
Controller with the Enterprise Controller
Use the proxyadm command to start Proxy Controller
services
Verify the new connection to the Enterprise Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deploying Additional Proxies: Manually Deploying a Proxy Controller (continued)

Creating a Temporary Password File
To create a temporary password file, use the commands:
# touch /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd
# chmod 400 /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd
# echo 'password' > /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd
Substitute the password for the administrative user for password.
Associating the Proxy Controller with the Enterprise Controller
To associate the Proxy Controller with the Enterprise Controller, use the command:
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/proxyadm configure -s
enterprise_controller_hostname -u admin_user -p /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd
Substitute the Enterprise Controller host name and administrative user name for
enterprise_controller_hostname and admin_user.
If the remote Proxy Controller has more than one network interface, add the a ip_address
option to explicitly state the Proxy Controllers IP address, and substitute the relevant IP
address for ip_address.
To remove the temporary password file, use the command:
# rm /var/tmp/OC/mypasswd
Starting Proxy Controller Services
To start the required Proxy Controller services, use the command:
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/proxyadm start -w
Verifying the Connection to the Enterprise Controller
To verify the connection to the Enterprise Controller, use the command:
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Uninstalling Ops Center

Uninstalling an Enterprise Controller requires stopping Enterprise Controller services, and
using the install script to uninstall the software.
The install script with the e option shuts down services and removes software generally
in the opposite order to the installation process.
Uninstalling Ops Center
Uninstalling an Enterprise Controller requires the following main
steps:
Use the satadm command to stop Enterprise Controller
services
# /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/satadm stop
Change directory to the location of the install script on
the Enterprise Controller, and run the install script with
the e option
# cd /var/tmp/OC/xvmoc_full_bundle
# install -e
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: You can use the Configuration wizard to
configure the co-located Proxy Controller, or a number of
remote Proxy Controllers
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: c
Quiz
Which command installs Enterprise Manager Ops Center Proxy
Controller software?
a. satadm
b. proxyadm
c. install -p
d. install -e
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center must run
with at least one configured Proxy Controller.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: d
Quiz
Which is not a requirement for storage used in an Enterprise
Manager Ops Center HA configuration?
a. Storage must provide for data redundancy, for example by
implementing RAID 1 or 5
b. Storage must be transferable from the primary Enterprise
Controller to the Secondary Enterprise Controller
c. Storage must offer performance sufficient to support
Enterprise Manager Ops Center operations
d. Storage must be available through NFS
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Summary
List system requirements for Enterprise Manager Ops Center
installation on both Oracle Solaris and Linux
Understand Enterprise Manager Ops Center configuration
options
Obtain software and prepare systems for Enterprise Manager
Ops Center installation
Describe Enterprise Manager Ops Center High Availability
configurations for Solaris and Linux
Perform a basic Enterprise Manager Ops Center installation and
identify options
Perform post installation software validation
Deploy proxies manually and using a wizard
Uninstall an Enterprise Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Practice 3 Overview: Installing Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center

This set of practices establishes the Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center environment that
you will use throughout the course.
Installing Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Performing Pre-Installation Checks
Configuring Web Browser Preferences
Installing the Enterprise Manager Ops Center Enterprise
Controller
Configuring the Enterprise Manager Ops Center Enterprise
Controller
Performing Post-Installation Validation
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Discovering Assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Objectives
Use Custom Discovery to discover assets
Declare configured and unconfigured assets
Use the Discover and Manage Assets wizard
Discover assets automatically
Configure a Windows OS for discovery
Register discovered assets
Discover a SPARC Enterprise M-Series server
Discover a Sun ZFS Storage Appliance
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Asset Discovery Overview
Asset discovery describes the actions you use to either discover or declare what assets exist
in your data center. Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides a number of different ways to
discover assets, including:
Custom Discovery - uses standard protocols, and credentials that you provide, to
discover systems that are already configured on your network
Declaring Assets uses indentifying information that you provide to create an asset
framework, both for configured and for unconfigured assets. Users declare server
assets, not operating system assets.
Discover and Manage Assets wizard combines discovery and management
functions in one interactive tool
Automatic Discovery uses service tags to discover assets on the network. This is
useful for discovering all assets that use service tags, and to register them with Oracle.
In the Navigation panel, selecting Assets > All Assets activates the discovery actions in the
Actions panel.
Discovering assets allows Enterprise Manager Ops Center to
determine what hardware and operating systems exist in your
data center. You must discover assets before you can manage
them.
uses these actions to discover
assets
Custom Discovery
Declaring Assets
Declare Configured Assets
Declare Unconfigured Assets
Discover and Manage Assets
wizard
Automatic Discovery
Discovery
actions
All Assets
node
selected
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Asset discovery actions group assets below two tabs in the center panel; Available to be
Managed Assets or Unclassified Assets
Available to be Managed Assets lists assets that are ready to be managed by
- For hardware assets and service processors, enabling management simply
requires a state change within Enterprise Manager Ops Center, from unmanaged
to managed
- For operating systems, management requires installation of an Enterprise
Manager Ops Center agent
- The jobs that you submit to manage assets install agents and make the required
state changes
Unclassified Assets lists assets that you can register, but not manage
- Examples of hardware and software that might appear in this list include Explorer
6.5, Sun Storage Tek 2540 arrays, J2SE 5.0 Development Kit, among other items.
These appear in this list because they advertise their service tags.
The Managed Assets tab lists all currently managed assets
Discovered assets are classified either as Available to be
Managed Assets or Unclassified Assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using Custom Discovery
The Custom Discovery action allows you to use specific criteria to discover assets, and
accesses systems using the network identity and access credentials that you provide.
For example, you can discover a system by providing the IP address of its service processor,
its administrative login credentials, and specifying the protocol used to access the service
processor. You can save sets of discovery criteria for future use.
Custom discovery uses some or all of the following protocols:
Service Tags (default), IPMI, SSH, JMX, Telnet, SNMP, WMI
Manageable assets discovered using these protocols are grouped in the Available to be
Managed Assets tab.
Assets discovered using Service Tags alone are grouped under the Unclassified Assets tab.
The Custom Discovery action enables you to specify asset
discovery criteria, provide access credentials, and discover
assets using various protocols
Discovery criteria can include:
Specific IP addresses
IP address ranges
Subnets
Host names
Assets discovered by Custom Discovery
are placed in the Available to be
Managed Assets tab in the center panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using Custom Discovery: Performing a Custom Discovery
To run a custom discovery, in the Navigation panel select Assets > All Assets. In the Actions
panel, select the Custom Discovery action. The Custom Asset Discovery panel displays.
Typically you would use the Custom Asset Discovery panel to create a new custom set of
discovery criteria, name and save the criteria, and then run the custom discovery using that
criteria.
The New Criteria icon enables the fields in the Discovery Criteria region. The Edit Criteria icon
allows you to edit criteria sets that you select from the saved criteria list.
The scrollable Discovery Criteria region contains the fields that you use to provide custom
discovery criteria.
To create new custom discovery criteria and run a custom discovery:
1. Click the New Criteria icon.
2. In the Discovery Criteria region, specify the discovery criteria that you want to use.
3. Click the Save icon to save the criteria.
4. Select the criteria from the saved criteria list.
5. Click Discover Assets.
Performing a Custom Discovery
New Criteria
icon
Scrollable
Discovery
Criteria
Saved criteria
list
Edit Criteria
icon
Save icon
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using Custom Discovery: Custom Asset Discovery Panel
Specifying custom discovery criteria typically requires scrolling through the Discovery Criteria
region, making selections and providing criteria as needed. The Discovery Criteria region
presents different options depending on your selections. These options include:
Basic and Service Tag criteria these options allow you to name your criteria set,
specify IP addresses or host names for the assets you want to discover, choose a
specific Proxy Controller to run the discovery, and to provide authentication, port, and
timeout values for Service Tag discovery, as needed.
Hardware or OS type selections the In addition, Search For Type drop-down list
allows you to choose the type of asset that you want to discover. This selection
determines the hardware or OS-specific protocol selections that you can subsequently
choose.
Hardware or OS-specific protocol selections and authentication credentials allows you
to choose the protocol and provide the authentication login and password that you want
to use to discover assets.
For security reasons, authentication credentials that you provide remain valid for one hour
after you save the discovery criteria. After that you must again provide valid credentials, either
using the Custom Discovery action, or using other actions that try to re-use these credentials.
Custom Asset Discovery Panel
Basic and
Service Tag
criteria
Hardware or OS
type selections
Hardware or OS-specific protocol
selections and authentication credentials
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Declaring Assets
The Declare Configured Assets and Declare Unconfigured Assets actions enable you to
manually specify what servers either already exist or in the future will exist in your data center.
You use these actions to declare server assets in preparation for OS provisioning. These
actions provide the means to build a framework for servers within Enterprise Manager Ops
Center even if the servers might not be currently operational.
Using Declare Configured Assets:
- You can import an XML file that lists the network identities and attributes of
multiple servers.
- You can easily declare a single server.
Using Declare Unconfigured Assets:
- You can declare multiple server assets by providing a range or comma-separated
list of IP addresses, a pattern for host names, and comma-separated list of MAC
addresses for servers that do not yet exist on your network.
Declaring Assets
Declaring assets enables you to manually declare server
assets without performing a discovery action
The Declare Configured Assets
action enables you to
Declare attributes for a single server
asset
Import an XML discovery file to
declare multiple servers
The Declare Unconfigured
Assets action enables you to
Declare one or more server assets
Use ranges of IP addresses and series
of host names to identify servers
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Declaring Assets: Using the Declare Configured Assets Action
To declare configured server assets, in the Navigation panel select Assets > All Assets. In
the Actions panel, select the Declare Configured Assets action. The Manually Declare
Assets to Oracle Ops Center panel displays.
To use an XML discovery file, select the Declare all servers specified in the discovery file
option, and use the Browse function to locate the XML discovery file on the system where
your browser is running.
To declare a single server, select the Declare a single server option, and provide the
required information about the server in the fields that become active.
Slides that follow describe XML discover files and the information needed to declare a single
server.
Click Declare Asset to submit the declare asset job.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center lists the server assets that you declare using the Declare
Configured Assets action in the Managed Assets tab. Normally, you declare systems in
preparation for provisioning operating systems. (and potentially, to install agents on the OS
instances after they have been provisioned)
Declaring Assets
Using the Declare Configured Assets Action
Select to use
an XML
discovery file
Select to
enable fields
that support
declaring a
single asset
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Declaring Assets: XML Discovery File
This example XML discovery file illustrates the tags that are required to define a single server.
You can include definitions for multiple servers by including multiple <server></server>
tags within the <servers></servers> tags. The XML discovery file uses these tags to
declare servers:
<server></server> tags that define a server
- name attribute that specifies the name used to identify the server in the list of
managed assets
- model attribute that specifies the server model for the server
- ipAddress attribute that specifies the IP address that you plan to use for the
OS that will run on the server . This address is used to assign the server to the
Proxy Controller that serves the subnet that the IP address identifies, and does not
set the IP address that the server will use.
<ethernetPort></ethernetPort> - tags that define a network port
- name attribute that specifies an Enterprise Manager Ops Center port identifier,
for example, GB_0, GB_1
- mac attribute that specifies the MAC address the port
Declaring Assets
XML Discovery File
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
<servers>
<server name="asset-06" model="Sun Fire V210 Server"
ipAddress="192.168.106.161">
<ethernetPort name="GB_0" mac="08:00:27:6E:38:69"/>
</server>
</servers>
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Declaring Assets: Using the Declare Configured Assets Action
If you select the Declare a single server option, these fields become active and allow you to
provide the required information for the asset:
Server Name provide the name used to identify the server in the list of managed
assets
IP Address provide the IP address that you plan to use for the OS that will run on the
server. This address is used to assign the server to the Proxy Controller that serves the
subnet that the IP address identifies, and does not set the IP address that the server will
use.
Model Categories select the server category that describes the server
Model select the specific model that describes the server
The Add Port/MAC icon also becomes available. Click the Add Port/MAC icon to display the
pop up box where you specify network attributes for the server, including:
Ethernet Port - specifies an Enterprise Manager Ops Center port identifier, for
example, GB_0, GB_1
MAC Address specifies the MAC address the port
Declaring Assets
Using the Declare Configured Assets Action
Specify
generic
network ports,
e.g. GB_0
Add Port/MAC
icon
Select a Model
Category and Model
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Declaring Assets: Using the Declare Unconfigured Assets Action
The Declare Unconfigured Assets action supports SP-based configuration of selected server
models. This action might be the first in a set of actions that take servers fresh from the
loading dock that have temporarily assigned IP addresses, configure their service processors
and RAID, and ultimately provision an OS on them.
To declare unconfigured assets, in the Navigation panel select Assets > All Assets. In the
Actions panel, select the Declare Unconfigured Assets action. The Manually Declare
Unconfigured Assets to Oracle Ops Center panel displays.
You must provide information for all of the fields in the Manually Declare Unconfigured Assets
to Oracle Ops Center panel.
Click Declare Asset to submit the declare asset job.
The Declare Unconfigured Assets action requires basic DHCP services running on the Proxy
Controllers that will support the systems that you declare. This action attempts to configure
DHCP support for the systems that you declare.
Run a separate Declare Unconfigured Assets action for each group of servers of the same
model. You can only select one Model Category and one associated Model for a Declare
Unconfigured Assets action.
Declaring Assets
Using the Declare Unconfigured Assets Action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Declaring Assets: Using the Declare Unconfigured Assets Action (continued)

The Declare Unconfigured Assets action requires this information:
Number of Servers the number of servers that this action will declare
Model Categories the model category for the servers. The listed model categories
and models are limited to servers whose service processors Enterprise Manager Ops
Center can configure.
Model the specific model of the servers
ServerNames - builds server names based on the pattern you define with these fields:
- Prefix the leading name component
- Starting Number the first number in a series, limited by the Number of Servers
field
- Suffix the trailing name component
Network the Enterprise Manager Ops Center network that will be used to assign IP
addresses to servers during OS provisioning
IP Addresses the list or range of IP addresses that you will search for the servers.
You can specify a comma-separated list, or a range of IP addresses. For example,
192.168.6.111-192.168.6.115 declares a range of five IP addresses.
MAC Addresses a comma-separated list of MAC addresses for the servers you are
declaring
Enterprise Manager Ops Center probes the IP addresses that you specify, searching for
the specified MAC addresses. When it finds assets, it names them according to the
pattern specified in the Server Names section.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard
You can use the Discover and Manage Assets wizard to:
Run service tag based discovery jobs to
- Discover hardware
- Discover operating systems
Manage hardware and operating systems that the wizard discovers, or that you have
previously discovered
Select specific Proxy Controllers to manage assets
The Discover and Manage Assets action offers the same actions as those run by the
discovery and management sections of the Configuration wizard.
When you use the Discover and Manage Assets wizard to manage previously-discovered
assets, the wizard looks for discovered assets that are grouped under the Unclassified Assets
tab.
The Discover and Manage Assets wizard uses service tags to
discover assets, and enables you to manage assets that you
select
This discovery method only finds
assets that have service tags
You can use this wizard to
manage assets that you have
already discovered
The Discover and Manage Assets
wizard groups discovered assets
under the Unclassified Assets tab
if they are not subsequently
managed
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard (continued)

Steps of the wizard will filter the discovered service tags into three categories:
Hardware assets:
- A step of the wizard allows you to select the hardware assets you want to manage
and enter their discovery credentials. Enterprise Manager Ops Center will
subsequently run a protocol-based discovery job on those assets, and manage the
ones it is able to successfully discover.
OS assets:
- A step of the wizard allows you to select the OS assets you want to manage and
enter their discovery credentials. Enterprise Manager Ops Center will again run a
protocol-based discovery job on those assets, and run an additional job to install
agents on the ones it can discover
Other:
- Any assets that do not match either category are left in the Unclassified Assets
tab.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard: Discover and Manage Panel
To run the Discover and Manage Assets wizard, in the Navigation panel select Assets > All
Assets. In the Actions panel, select the Discover and Manage Assets action. The Discover
and Manage panel displays.
The Discover and Manage panel presents two options:
Run discovery now
- This option runs a service tag based discovery job
I have already discovered assets. Go to Manage Hardware
- This option skips running a discovery job and proceeds to the Manage Hardware
section of the wizard. The wizard shows hardware that is grouped below the
Unclassified Assets tab.
Click Next to advance through panels in the Discover and Manage Assets wizard.
Discover and Manage Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard: Running a Discovery Job
If you select the Run discovery now option, a service tag based discovery job runs. When
the discovery job completes and you close the Service Tag Discovery pop-up, the Discovered
Hardware panel displays.
The Discovered Hardware panel also displays when you choose to manage already-
discovered hardware.
In the Discovered Hardware panel, you can select the hardware that you want to manage, or
select none.
Running a Discovery Job
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard: Manage Hardware Panel
If you choose to manage hardware, the Manage Hardware panel displays. Here you choose
one of the following options to provide the authentication credentials needed to access the
hardware that you want to manage:
Use factory-set credentials
- The wizard tries using factory default login credentials to access the selected
hardware
Use the same credentials for all systems listed below
- The wizard uses the credentials that you provide in the Username and Password
fields to access all hardware listed
Use individual credentials for all systems listed below
- The wizard uses the credentials that you provide for each hardware component in
its associated Username and Password fields
A software update service warning displays after this panel if your Enterprise Manager Ops
Center instance has not yet been configured to run either in connected or in disconnected
mode.
Manage Hardware Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard: Discovered Operating Systems
Panel
In the Discovered Operating Systems panel, you can select the operating systems that you
want to manage, or select none.
Discovered Operating Systems Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard: Manage Operating Systems
Panel
In the Manage Operating Systems panel, you choose one of the following options to provide
the authentication credentials needed to access the operating systems that you want to
manage:
Use the same SSH credentials for all systems listed below - The wizard uses the
credentials that you provide to access all operating systems listed
Use individual SSH credentials for all systems listed below - The wizard uses the
credentials that you provide for each operating system in its associated Username and
Password fields
Both options use these fields to specify credentials:
SSH User User name to access the operating system via SSH. If this is a privileged
user or role, only this users credentials are required.
user access
Manage Operating Systems Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using the Discover and Manage Assets Wizard: Summary Panel
After making your discovery selections, the Discover and Manage Assets wizard displays the
Summary panel.
Jobs that install agents on operating systems that you chose to manage will continue to run
after you click Finish to close the wizard.
Assets that you do not choose to manage will remain listed in the Unclassified Assets tab in
the center panel.
Summary Panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using Automatic Discovery
The Automatic Discovery action searches for service tags on all networks to which your Proxy
Controllers are connected. The Automatic Discovery action places all of the assets it
discovers into the Unclassified Assets tab. This discovery action requires no authentication
credentials.
Automatic Discovery searches subnets associated with the
configured network interfaces of every Proxy Controller for
embedded Sun Service Tags or Open Service Tags
After discovering service tag-
equipped assets, Automatic
Discovery places them below the
Unclassified Assets tab
To begin managing these assets,
you must use the
Discovery/Management Wizard
or discover them using Custom
Discovery
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

To run an Automatic Discovery, in the Navigation panel select Assets > All Assets. In the
Actions panel, select the Automatic Discovery action. The Automatic Discovery panel
displays. Click Discover Assets to run the service tag discovery job.
When the service tag discovery job completes, click the Unclassified Assets tab in the
center panel to view the list of discovered assets. You can subsequently use the Discover and
Manage Assets wizard to manage these assets, or use the Custom Discovery action to
discover assets using other protocols, and group assets under the Available to be Managed
tab.
You might want only to register assets that the Automatic Discovery action discovered. You
can use the Register Assets action to register discovered assets.
List of discovered
assets
Automatic
Discovery panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Registering Assets
You can register your discovered assets with My Oracle Support, whether or not you choose
to manage them.
You must register any assets for which you want to open a My Oracle Support service ticket.
A valid support contract must be associated with the asset(s) in the customers account.
You must register your Enterprise Controller before you can register additional assets. You
can register your Enterprise Controller:
Using the Register Assets wizard
Using the Register Enterprise Controller action that is available when you select the
Enterprise Controller node below Navigation > Administration
Registering Assets
Registering your discovered assets with My Oracle Support
enables you to maintain an online inventory of the assets in
your datacenter
You must register your
Enterprise Controller before you
can register additional assets
The Register Assets wizard
provides steps to register your
Enterprise Controller, if needed
You can use the Register
Assets wizard to register assets
that you have already
discovered, or to run a new
Service-Tag discovery job
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Registering Assets: Running the Register Assets Wizard
To register assets with My Oracle Support, in the Navigation panel select Assets > All
Assets. In the Actions panel, select the Register Assets action. The Register Assets wizard
displays.
The Register Assets wizard presents different options depending if your Enterprise Controller
is already registered.
If your Enterprise Controller is not registered, the Register Assets wizard first presents
steps to identify your HTTP proxy, provide online account credentials, and select a team
association, before the steps to discover, select and register assets
If your Enterprise Controller is registered, the Register Assets wizard presents steps to
discover assets, select assets to register, and to register assets
Registering Assets
Running the Register Assets Wizard
Register Assets Wizard requiring
Enterprise Controller registration
Register Assets Wizard with an already-
registered Enterprise Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Registering Assets: Running a Service Tag Discovery
The Discovery panel in the Register Assets wizard provides two discovery options:
Discover systems now runs a Service Tag based discovery job
Do not run discovery now - uses the list of already-discovered assets to select assets
to register
In either case, the Register Assets wizard reconciles the list of discovered assets with the list
of assets that you have already registered, and then continues.
Registering Assets
Running a Service Tag Discovery
The Register Assets wizard enables you to either run a
Service Tag based discovery job, or to use the list of
already-discovered assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Registering Assets: Selecting Assets to Register
The Select Assets panel of the Register Assets wizard shows the list of discovered assets
that are not currently registered with My Oracle Support.
Select the assets that you want to register, and click Next.
Registering Assets
Selecting Assets to Register
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Registering Assets: Running the Asset Registration
The Register Assets panel shows the list of assets that you selected to register.
Click Register to register the assets with My Oracle Support. A Summary panel displays.
Click Close to close the Summary panel and exit the Register Assets wizard.
Registering Assets
Running the Asset Registration
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Configuring a Windows OS for Discovery
Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides high-level agentless monitoring capabilities for
selected Windows OS versions. To allow Enterprise Manager Ops Center to monitor Windows
OS instances, you must enable Windows Management Instrumentation (WMI) control. To
enable WMI control on a Windows system:
1. Select Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management
2. Expand Services and Applications
3. Right-click WMI Control and select Properties
4. In the WMI Control Properties panel, select the Security tab, then click the Security
button
5. Check the Allow check box for the Remote Enable permission
6. Click Apply and Ok as needed to apply the change and close the Computer
Management tool.
With the Remote Enable permission allowed, you can run a Custom Discovery to discover the
Windows instance. You might also need to enable WMI traffic through your firewall.
Set WMI Control properties
to enable remote monitoring
for Windows operating
systems
Remote Enable
permission
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Configuring a Windows OS for Discovery: Discovering a Windows OS
You can discover and monitor Windows OS instances that have WMI control properly
configured.
You can use the Custom Discovery action to create custom discovery criteria for Windows
systems.
In the discovery criteria, select Windows OS from the In addition, Search For Type
pull-down field
Provide the required WMI authentication credentials
Discovering a Windows OS
With WMI control properly configured, you can discover
Windows OS instances
Use the Custom Discovery action, and provide WMI
authentication credentials
WMI authentication
credentials
Windows OS
discovery type
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series Server: Overview
You can use the Custom Discovery action to discover XSCF service processors and dynamic
system domains associated with Sun or Fujitsu SPARC Enterprise M-Series servers. The
discovery job for an XSCF server also automatically discovers any configured dynamic
system domains on the system.
Discovering M-Series servers requires that the XSCF system processor has:
A configured network interface
A user who is assigned the platadm privilege
You have to manually configure the XSCF service processor on a new M-Series system.
Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series Server
Overview
To discover a Sun or Fujitsu SPARC Enterprise M3000, M4000,
M5000, M8000 or M9000 server, you use the Custom Discovery
action and provide the information required to discover the
eXtended System Control Facility (XSCF) service processor
Discovering an M-Series server
requires a configured XSCF
service processor, with a
configured network and
established user account
platadm privilege
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series Server: Using Custom Discovery
To run a custom discovery for an M-Series server, in the Navigation panel select Assets > All
Assets. In the Actions panel, select the Custom Discovery action. The Custom Asset
Discovery panel displays.
Provide the basic discovery criteria for the XSCF service processor, including the:
- Discovery criteria name
- Save criteria for future use and Save password in criteria options
- IP address or hostname of the XSCF service processor
In the In addition, Search For Type field, select XSCF Service Processor
- Provide either SSH or Telnet protocol authentication credentials, depending on the
protocol enabled on your XSCF service processor
Optionally save the criteria
Select the criteria and click Discover Assets
Run the Custom Discovery
action
Provide basic discovery criteria
Select XSCF Service Processor
system type, and provide XSCF
login credentials
XSCF Service
Processor type
XSCF login
credentials
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Discovering a SPARC Enterprise M-Series Server: Successful Discovery
When the custom discovery job successfully completes, the XSCF service processor is listed
in the Available to be Managed tab in the center panel, and below the M-Series Servers node
in the Assets list.
Configured dynamic system domains are listed below the XSCF service processor in the
Assets list.
Successful Discovery
Configured dynamic
system domain
XSCF service
processor without a
configured dynamic
system domain
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Discovering a Sun ZFS Storage Appliance
It is recommended to discover both the service processor and the appliance
When you use Custom Discovery to discover a Sun ZFS Storage Appliance, discover the
appliance first. When you subsequently discover the service processor, Enterprise Manager
Ops Center maps the service processor to the corresponding appliance below the Storage
node in the Assets tree.
Discovering the service processor alone places the service processor below the Servers node
in the Assets tree. If you subsequently discover the appliance, the service processor node
moves to become associated with the appliance below the Storage node.
Discovering a Sun ZFS Storage Appliance
The Sun ZFS Storage Appliance family of storage products
support discovery of the appliance service processor, the
appliance itself, or both
Automatic Discovery places the service processor and
storage appliance assets into the Unclassified Assets tab
Use the Discover and Manage Assets action to subsequently
manage these assets
Use Custom Discovery to discover the storage appliance
first, and then to discover the service processor
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Answer: a
Quiz
Which of the following is not a discovery method in Oracle
Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center?
a. Manual Discovery
b. Automatic Discovery
c. Custom Discovery
d. Discover and Manage Assets wizard
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Answer: b
Quiz
True or False: Declaring assets requires all assets to be
already configured and connected to your data center network.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Answer: c, d
Quiz
The Discover and Manage Assets wizard performs the same
kind of discovery operation as which other discovery method or
methods?
a. Declaring Assets
b. Manual Discovery
c. Custom Discovery
d. Automatic Discovery
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: To discover an M-Series server, you typically
use Custom Discovery to discover its XSCF service processor.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Summary
Use Custom Discovery to specify discovery criteria and
discover assets
Build an XML file to declare configured and unconfigured
assets
Use the Discover and Manage Assets wizard
Run an Automatic Discovery job
Configure a Windows OS for discovery and specify
discovery criteria
Use the Register Assets action
Discover SPARC Enterprise M-Series servers
Discover a Sun ZFS Storage Appliance
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Discovering Assets
Enabling discovered assets for management
Creating Custom Asset Discovery Criteria for a Service
Processor
Creating Custom Asset Discovery Criteria for an Operating
System
Discovering Assets Using Custom Discovery
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Managing Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops
Center Libraries
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Objectives
Identify Enterprise Manager Ops Center libraries, including
Software Libraries, Storage Libraries, and Solaris/Linux
Updates Libraries
Create EC Local Software Libraries
Create EC NAS Software libraries
Import OS images into an EC Local Software Library
Import firmware images into an EC Local Software Library
View default plans and profiles
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries: Overview

Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses libraries to store the data that it uses to support
a variety of capabilities, including OS and firmware provisioning, updating software, and
deploying virtualized OS instances. Three main categories of libraries support these
capabilities:
Software Libraries
Software Libraries cache data that mainly supports provisioning capabilities, including
provisioning Oracle Solaris and Linux operating systems, and provisioning firmware. This
lesson focuses the procedures used to create and manage Software Libraries. You must
create a library before you can bring an image into Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Storage Libraries
Fibre-Channel Storage and NAS Storage libraries store data that mainly supports deploying
virtualized OS instances, either for Oracle VM Server for SPARC, or Oracle Solaris Zones.
Solaris/Linux Updates
Libraries listed below this node store update content, including metadata for patches and
patch data itself. The Local Content library also resides below this node to add site-specific
files.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries
Overview
Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses libraries to manage
cached data or resources, and organizes libraries under three
main categories:
Software Libraries
Store OS Images and firmware images, mainly used to support
provisioning capabilities
This lesson focuses on creating and managing these libraries
Storage Libraries
Store guest OS metadata, guest OS instances, and guest data,
mainly used to support deploying virtualized OS instances
Solaris/Linux Updates
Store data used to support OS update functions in Enterprise
Manager Ops Center, and local content
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries Overview Software Libraries

Software libraries store data used to support Enterprise Manager Ops Center provisioning
functions. Enterprise Manager Ops Center allows you to determine the local directories
and/or NFS resources that you want to hold these libraries.
EC Local Libraries use space in file systems that are local to the Enterprise
Controller
EC NAS Libraries use space in NFS shared file systems that the Enterprise
Controller mounts
These libraries support Enterprise Manager Ops Center provisioning capabilities by storing
the following types of data:
OS Images ISO images of operating system installation media, used to provision
operating systems on target assets
Flash Archives (FLARs) Oracle Solaris OS archives, typically used to provision
custom-configured operating systems to target assets
Firmware images used to update service processor or other firmware
Branded OS images Oracle Solaris 8 or 9 images used to provision non-global zones
Overview Software Libraries
Software Libraries cache and organize data mainly used to
support provisioning capabilities
uses two types of Software Libraries
EC Local Libraries
EC NAS Libraries
Software Libraries store data
including:
OS images
Flash archives (FLARs)
Firmware images
Branded OS images
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries Overview Storage Libraries

Storage libraries store data that is used to support virtualized OS instances (also known as
guest OS instances, or simply guests) that are managed by Oracle VM Server for SPARC and
Oracle Solaris Zones technologies. For both of these virtualization technologies, Enterprise
Manager Ops Center uses Storage Libraries to store or provide:
Metadata that describes the configuration of guest OS instances (NAS only)
Guest OS instances themselves
Additional data storage used by guests
Two types of Storage Libraries provide space for this purpose:
Fibre Channel Storage A Fibre Channel Storage library uses logical unit numbers
(LUNs) that virtualization hosts access through a Fibre-Channel fabric
NAS Storage A NAS Storage library uses space in NFS-shared file systems that the
virtualization hosts access through your network
Overview Storage Libraries
Storage Libraries store data that is mainly used to support
virtualized OS instances
uses two types of Storage Libraries
Fibre Channel Storage
NAS Storage
Storage Libraries store data
including:
OS metadata (NAS only)
OS instances for virtualized systems
Additional data storage
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center Libraries Overview Solaris/Linux OS Updates

Two libraries below the Solaris/Linux OS Updates node in the Libraries panel organize data
used for updates and system customization.
Update Components
This library organizes and presents metadata that is associated with potentially downloadable
patch content. Only metadata is visible through this library, and not the actual associated
patch content. Content is organized according to OS distribution. When you select this library,
a pull-down menu in the center panel allows you to view the patch metadata that is associated
with different OS distributions.
Local Content
This library organizes custom software, patches, packages, script files, and configuration files
used for customized installation of updates, or for special modifications that you might want to
make to operating systems or applications.
The Update Components library also provides access to local content, through the Local node
that it contains.
Overview Solaris/Linux OS Updates
Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses libraries organized below
the Solaris/Linux OS Updates node in the Libraries panel to
perform OS update operations, and to store local content
The Update Components library
provides access to metadata
associated with the OS update
distribution that you select
The Local Content library contains
items used for customizing
installation of updates, or data used
for other special operations
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing EC Local Libraries: Creating an EC Local Library

The actions that allow you to create a new EC Local Library or EC NAS Library become active
when you select Libraries > Software Libraries in the Navigation panel. Selecting either the
EC Local Libraries or EC NAS Libraries node enables only the action that allows you to create
the corresponding type of Software Library.
Creating Software Libraries
Create new Software Libraries to determine where you will
store data to support Enterprise Manager Ops Center
provisioning operations
In the Navigation panel, select
Libraries > Software Libraries to
enable the actions that allow you to
create new Software Libraries
Select one of these actions to
create a new Software Library
New EC Local Library
New EC NAS Library
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing Software Libraries: Creating an EC Local Library

When you select the New EC Local Library action, the Create EC Local Library panel
displays. Provide the following information:
Library Name the name of the library that will display in the Navigation pane
Library Description an optional brief description of the EC Local Library
Directory Name the name of the directory that you want to use for the library,
expressed as a file:// URL. For example:
- file:///var/opt/ec-01-OSlib
Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates the directory that you specify if it does not already
exist.
You can create an EC Local Library in any directory on your Enterprise Controller where it
makes sense to store the large files that these libraries typically hold. Previous versions of
Enterprise Manager Ops Center automatically created libraries for OS provisioning below the
/var/opt/sun/xvm directory structure. Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center enables you
to choose where to place these libraries.
You can create multiple EC Local Library to help organize images according to your needs.
Creating an EC Local Library
The New EC Local Library action enables you to choose the
directory on your Enterprise Controller to use to hold a new EC
Local Library
Provide this
information:
Library Name
Library
Description
Directory
Name
Click Create
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing Software Libraries: Creating an EC Local Library

The center panel describes the characteristics of the new library, including:
URL the directory that holds the library on the Enterprise Controller
Size the total amount of space allocated to the file system where the library is stored
Used Space the percent of the Size value that has been used
Added the date when the library was created
Modified the date when the library was last modified
State the health of the library. If the library is in the FAULTED state, a Reason field
describes the fault.
Access the access permissions the library allows
Library Contents the software objects that the library contains, typically OS ISO
images or Flash archives (FLARs)
Service Processor Firmware the firmware objects for service processors that the
library contains
Component Firmware the firmware objects for storage devices that the library
contains
Creating an EC Local Library
The center panel provides information about the new library
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing EC Local Libraries: Creating an EC NAS Library

When you select the New EC NAS Library action, the New NAS Library panel displays.
Provide the following information:
Library Name the name of the library that will display in the Navigation pane
Library Description an optional brief description of the EC Local Library
Virtual Pool Association you can associate the library with a virtual pool, as needed
Select the type of Service:
- Exported share on a managed asset select this option and choose the
managed asset and the share from that asset that you want to use for the EC NAS
library
- Other Select this option to specify the URL for an NFS share from a host other
than a managed network appliance. For example:
nfs://asset-nn/export/oclib1
Enterprise Manager Ops Center automatically mounts the NFS share below a directory
it makes in the /var/mnt/virtlibs directory structure, and adds an entry for the
NFS mount into the /etc/vfstab file on the Enterprise Controller
Creating an EC NAS Library
The New EC NAS Library
action enables you to choose
a shared directory to use for a
new EC NAS Library
Provide this information:
Library name and
description
Virtual Pool association
Service type
Exported share on a
managed asset
Other
Click Create
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing EC Local Libraries: Creating an EC Local Library

The center panel presents a set of tabs that describe the characteristics of the new library,
including:
Summary This tab presents the same information about the library as the center
panel presents for EC Local Libraries
Usage This tab describes how Oracle VM Server for SPARC (LDoms) and Oracle
Solaris Zones guest OS instances use this librarys resources
Disks This tab describes how space in this library has been allocated to guest OS
instances, including the space allocated for ZFS pools and for root file systems
Problems This tab lists problems associated with the library
Monitoring This tab provides controls for monitoring parameters for the library
The Libraries > Storage Libraries > NAS Storage node also lists the libraries that you
create using the New EC NAS Library action. The Summary tab in the center panel lists the
information that pertains to using a NAS library for provisioning purposes. The Usage and
Disks tabs pertain more to using a NAS library to support deploying virtualized OS instances.
Creating an EC NAS Library
The center panel provides information about the new library
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries

When you navigate to the EC Local Libraries or EC NAS Libraries node in the Navigation
panel and select a library, the actions for managing libraries become active. Select the library
that you want to hold the new image, then select the action that you want to run. These
actions bring ISO images of operating systems into Enterprise Manager Ops Center:
Upload ISO Image This action enables you to upload ISO images to the Enterprise
Controller from the system where you are running your browser.
Import Image This action enables you to import ISO images or FLARs that are
located in a file system on the Enterprise Controller.
Download OS Image This action enables you to download ISO images or FLARs
from My Oracle Support. Currently only Solaris 10 images and FLARs are available.
Use the Upload ISO Image and Import
Image actions to bring an operating system
ISO image into Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
In the Navigation panel, navigate to
Libraries > Software Libraries > EC Local
Libraries or EC NAS Libraries and select a
library to enable the actions that allow you to
upload or import images
Use Upload ISO Image to upload ISO
images from the system where your browser
is running
Use Import Image to import ISO images or
FLARs from your Enterprise Controller
Use Download OS Image to download ISO
images or FLARs from Oracle
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries: Uploading an OS Image

When you select the Upload OS Image action, the Browse function of the Upload an ISO
Image panel displays. Enterprise Manager Ops Center also might display certificate warnings
when you run this action. Choose to accept certificates and run the application to proceed to
the Upload an ISO Image panel.
The Upload an ISO Image panel enables you to browse the file systems of the system where
you are running your web browser. Choose the ISO image that you want to upload, and
provide the following information:
Source of ISO file this field is automatically populated with the name of the file that
you selected using the Browse function
ISO image name the name that you want to assign to the ISO file, as it will appear in
the Software Library
Description an optional brief description of the ISO file
Click Upload Image to upload the file that you selected.
Uploading an OS Image
Use the Upload ISO Image action to locate and upload an OS
ISO image on the system running your web browser
Upload an ISO Image
panel
Browse function
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries: Importing an OS Image

When you select the Import Image action, the Import an Image panel displays. Use this panel
to provide the following information:
Image Name the name that you want to assign to the image file, as it will appear in
the Software Library
Description an optional brief description of the image
Import From select the A directory that is accessible by Enterprise Controller
option from the pull down list to choose an image file from a directory on the Enterprise
Controller. Choose the library_name/blobs directory from the pull down list to
choose an image file from the blobs directory below the EC Local library you selected
Directory use the Browse function to locate the directory that contains the image
file that you want to import
Image Type select ISO to import an ISO image, or select FLAR to import a flash
archive file. A field that requires you to identify an parent ISO for the FLAR
displays if you select the FLAR option.
Select an Image Below select the image file that you want to import
Click Import Image to import the file that you selected.
Importing an OS Image
Use the Import
Image action to
locate and import an
ISO file on the
The Import an
Image panel
allows you to
import OS
images and
flash archive
files (FLARs)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries: Downloading an OS Image

When you select the Download OS Image action, the Download OS image panel displays.
Use the radio buttons in this panel to choose the image or FLAR that you want to download.
You have access to the source of these images when you run Enterprise Manager Ops
Center in connected mode.
Full OS ISO images, boot-only OS images, and FLARs are identified as ISO, ISO Boot
Only, and FLAR image types, respectively
The plus (+) icons associated with boot-only images expand to show the FLAR images
that relate to that same OS release
Before you can download a FLAR, you must download its parent boot-only ISO image.
Download jobs for FLARs fail if no parent boot-only ISO exists on the Enterprise
Controller.
Click View License to view the license associated with any image.
Click Accept License and Download to begin the image download.
Downloading an OS Image
Use the Download an OS Image action to obtain full OS ISO
images, ISO boot-only images, or FLARs from My Oracle
Support
Click the + icons to
view related FLARs
Click a radio button to
select the item that
you want to download
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries: Viewing OS Image Details, Plans

and Profiles
Software Libraries list full ISO and boot-only ISO images in the Library Contents section of the
center panel. Enterprise Manager Ops Center stores ISO and FLARs below
/var/opt/sun/xvm/images/os on the Enterprise Controller, but does not list FLARs in
the library that holds the parent ISO.
The Create Profile action that you use to build profiles for OS provisioning will list the
available FLARs.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center automatically creates a default plan and profile for each OS
ISO image that you upload, import, or download.
Viewing OS Image Details, Plans and Profiles
ISO images become available in the selected Software
Library
For each ISO file, the ISO upload,
import, or download job creates a
default profile and deployment plan
You can view information that is
related to ISO images by:
Selecting the library that holds an
ISO image
Selecting the default deployment
plan for an ISO image
Selecting the default OS
provisioning profile for an ISO
image
Default deployment plans
Default profiles
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries: Viewing OS Image Details, Plans

and Profiles (continued)
You can view information, plans, and profiles that are related to ISO images by:
Selecting Libraries > EC Local Libraries or EC NAS Libraries, and the library that
holds the ISO image. The center panel lists the name, type, size, and last modify date
for each ISO image it contains.
Selecting Plan Management > Deployment Plans, expanding the Provision OS node,
and selecting the default deployment plan. The Details, Results, Referrers, Version
History, and Jobs tabs in the center panel provide additional information.
Selecting Plan Management > Profiles and Policies, expanding the OS Provisioning
node, and selecting the default OS profile. Tabs provide additional information.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries: Managing Images

When you select an ISO image in a Software Library, actions that allow you to manage
images become active. The Upload ISO Image and Import Image actions stay active while
you have a Software Library or an image in a Software Library selected. These actions
include:
Upload ISO Image provides the same functions as Actions > Upload ISO Image
Import Image provides the same functions as Actions > Import Image
View Image Details shows the name and description of the selected image
Edit Image Details enables you to edit the name and description of the selected
image
Delete Image deletes the selected image
Move Image enables you to move an image from one library to another
Managing Images
The center panel offers actions that you can use to view image
details and manage images
Upload ISO Image
Import Image
View Image Details
Edit Image Details
Delete Image
Move Image
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Importing OS Images Into EC Local Libraries: Managing Images

To run any of these actions, select the image that you want to manage, then select the icon
for the action that you want to run. For example:
If you select the Edit Image Details action, the Edit Image Details dialog displays. Here
you can change the image name and image description. Edit the fields that you want to
change, and click Submit to make the change.
If you select the Move Image action, the Move an Image dialog displays. Here you can
move an image from its current library to a library that you select from the Move To list.
Select the destination library, and click Move Image.
Managing Images
Move Image dialog
Edit Image Details
dialog
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Uploading Firmware Images into Software Libraries

The Upload Firmware action becomes active when you navigate to the EC Local Libraries
or EC NAS Libraries node in the Navigation panel and select a library. The Upload
Firmware action enables you to upload firmware objects into Software Libraries in Enterprise
Manager Ops Center.
It is important to know what firmware objects a specific system requires, and to upload all of
the firmware objects into Enterprise Manager Ops Center that are needed to successfully
update firmware on that system. It is possible to create firmware update profiles and plans
that might not install all needed firmware components, which, if run, might prevent systems
from being able to boot.
Be certain to understand what firmware your systems require for firmware updates to
succeed, and to create firmware update profiles and plans that install the correct firmware.
Read any README files that are associated with the firmware that you intend to use in
Enterprise Manager Ops Center, to learn what platforms use the firmware, and what
dependencies might exist.
The Set Enterprise Controller Storage Library administration action enables you to choose
a Software Library to receive automatic firmware downloads. When enabled, this function
automatically downloads firmware and imports it into Enterprise Manager Ops Center. This
function is described in the lesson that describes firmware provisioning.
Uploading Firmware Images into Software
Libraries
Use the Upload Firmware action to
bring firmware images into Enterprise
Manager Ops Center
In the Navigation panel, navigate to
Libraries > Software Libraries > EC
Local Libraries or EC NAS Libraries
and select a library to enable the
Upload Firmware action
Firmware uploads to the library that you
select before you run the Upload
Firmware action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

When you select the Upload Firmware action, the Define Firmware panel of the Upload
Firmware wizard displays.
Choose to load firmware either from the Enterprise Controller or from your local system,
and use the Browse function to select a firmware file to upload.
- When you load firmware from the Enterprise Controller, click the Select File button
in the Browse function to choose the firmware file.
- When you load firmware from the local host, click the Open button in the Browse
function to choose the firmware file, then click Upload.
Provide the information requested in the Image Details section, if the firmware file you
selected or uploaded has no associated metadata.
Click Next to continue.
If a warning about an unresponsive script displays, click Continue to allow the script to
continue running. Stopping the script will prevent the firmware upload from succeeding.
Libraries
Select the firmware file to upload, and provide metadata
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using information from README files associated with the firmware that you want to upload,
select the platforms that the firmware supports.
Use <Ctrl>-click to make multiple selections in the Available Platforms list.
Click Add to add your platform selections to the Supported Platforms list.
Libraries
Choose the platforms that the firmware supports
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Provide the following information:
Type Select the correct firmware type from the pull-down list
Version Enter the firmware version number
Depends on firmware Select other firmware on which this firmware depends, if
applicable
Options Check the box if the firmware requires the host system to power off to update
the firmware
Libraries
Specify the firmware type, version, dependencies, and options
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Summary panel shows all of the selections and information that you provided in the
previous panels. Click Finish to upload the firmware, or click Back to return to previous
panels and make changes.
Libraries
Click Finish to upload firmware
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

When you select a Software Library that contains firmware images, those images are listed in
the center panel. Compressing the Library Contents node or scrolling the information in the
center panel helps you to view the list of uploaded firmware in the Service Processor
Firmware node.
Note that the example on this slide includes two firmware images:
ALOM_1.6.9_boot - type: alombootfw
ALOM_1.6.9_main - type: alommainfw
Both of these firmware images are needed to successfully update the firmware on the servers
that theses objects support. Specifically, attempting to update only the alombootfw
component without also updating the alommainfw component will cause the affected system
to be unable to boot.
Be certain to upload firmware and create firmware profiles and plans that install all firmware
components that your systems require.
Libraries
Uploaded firmware images are listed in the center panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

When you select a firmware image in a Software Library, actions that allow you to manage
firmware images become active. The Upload Firmware action stays active while you have a
Software Library or a firmware image in a Software Library selected. These actions include:
Edit Firmware Package enables you to change some of the details that you specified
in the Upload Firmware wizard, or that were contained in the firmware metadata
Delete Firmware removes the selected firmware image
View Image Details displays the details that you specified in the Upload Firmware
wizard, or that were contained in the firmware metadata
Upload Firmware - provides the same functions as Actions > Upload Firmware
Libraries Managing Images
The center panel offers actions that you can use to view
firmware image details and manage images
Edit Firmware Package
Delete Firmware
View Image Details
Upload Firmware
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

To run any of these actions, select the firmware image that you want to manage, then select
the icon for the action that you want to run. For example:
If you select the Edit Firmware Package action, the Edit Firmware Package dialog
displays. Here you can change the firmware description, version, power off option,
supported platforms, firmware type and dependency. Edit the fields that you want to
change, and click Save to save your changes.
If you select the View Image Details action, the Firmware Image Details panel displays.
This panel shows the details that you specified in the Upload Firmware wizard, or that
were contained in the firmware metadata. Click Close when finished.
Libraries
Edit Firmware
Package dialog
Firmware Image
Details panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Uploading Firmware Images into Software Libraries - Viewing Firmware Image

Plans and Profiles
Enterprise Manager Ops Center automatically creates a default deployment plan and profile
for each firmware image that you upload.
You can view the plans and profiles that are related to firmware images by:
Selecting Plan Management > Deployment Plans, expanding the Update Firmware
node, and selecting the default deployment plan. The Details, Results, Referrers,
Version History, and Jobs tabs in the center panel provide additional information.
Selecting Plan Management > Profiles and Policies, expanding the Firmware node,
and selecting the default firmware profile. The Details, Referrers, and Version History
tabs provide additional information.
Libraries - Viewing Firmware Plans and Profiles
For each firmware file, the
firmware upload job creates
a default profile and
deployment plan
You can view the plans and
profiles that are related to
firmware images by
navigating to Plan
Management, and:
Selecting the default
deployment plan for a
firmware image
Selecting the default profile
for a firmware image
Default profiles
Default
deployment
plans
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Editing Library Attributes

The Edit Library Attributes action enables you to change the name and description of the
Software Library that you select.
With the Software Library whose attributes you want to change selected, either click the Edit
Library Attributes action, or click the Edit icon. The Library Name and Library Description
fields become editable.
Edit the fields as desired, then click the Save or Cancel icons to either save your changes or
cancel the edit session.
Editing Library Attributes
You can edit a librarys name and description
Edit
Save
Cancel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates default
plans and profiles for OS ISO images and firmware images that
you upload.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: When you create Software Libraries, you can
choose the local directory on the Enterprise Controller that will
hold the library.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: b
Quiz
When you download or import a Flash Archive (FLAR), what
item is required to already exist in Enterprise Manager Ops
Center for the download or import job to succeed?
a. A firmware image for the systems that will use the FLAR
b. The parent boot-only ISO image for the FLAR
c. An ISO image of installation media for the OS in the FLAR
d. Nothing additional is required for the job to succeed
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Summary
Identify Software Libraries, Storage Libraries, and
Solaris/Linux Updates Libraries, and describe the purpose
of each
Create EC Local Software Libraries
Create EC NAS Software libraries
Import OS images into an EC Local Software Library
Import firmware images into an EC Local Software Library
View default plans and profiles for both OS images and
firmware images
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Managing Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Libraries
Creating new local software libraries
Importing an ISO Image
Viewing a default OS Profile and Deployment Plan
Loading a firmware image
Viewing a default Firmware Profile and Deployment Plan
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Introducing Plan Management
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Objectives
This lesson focuses on the new Plan Management capability in Oracle Enterprise
Manager 11g Ops Center. Its primary focus is to provide an overview of the capability,
and introduce students to:
Deployment Plans: These plans are used for most Enterprise Manager Ops Center
management operations
Operational Plans: These plans are used to execute scripts
This lesson will use a deployment profile and plan that is automatically generated by
uploading an OS Provisioning image to the Enterprise Controller library as an example.
It will focus on manual creation of an operational plan and profile, since there is no auto-
generate capability for operational plans.
The lessons that follow will show the plans and profiles that are relevant for the specific
management operation: for instance, the hardware section will discuss deployment
plans to configure firmware, install firmware, etc. As such, it will not focus on specific
kinds of deployment plans, profiles or policies.
The lesson assumes prior exposure to the BUI, to the Enterprise Controller library, and
(to a lesser degree) to the permissions model used by Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Objectives
Navigate the Plan Management section in the Browser UI
Describe the purpose of each section in the Plan
Management tab
View a deployment plan and its associated profile
Create a new deployment plan and profile
Update the settings in a profile, and update the associated
deployment plan to reference a new profile version
Apply a deployment plan in Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
Use a script to create an operational plan and profile
Apply an operational plan in Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Objectives (continued)
This lesson also provides background material for Monitoring Profiles and the Problem
Knowledge Base. These items are located in the same part of the UI, but dont really relate to
the topic at hand. There will be more in-depth coverage of the topics in the following sections:
Monitoring Profile: Lesson 6, Managing and Monitoring Assets using Enterprise
Manager Ops Center
Problems Knowledge Base: Lesson 18, Managing Problems, Service Requests and
Notifications using Enterprise Manager Ops Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Plans and Profiles: Overview

Most management operations in Enterprise Manager Ops Center are now performed by using
plans. Plans (and their associated profiles) can be stored in Enterprise Manager Ops Center
and repeatedly executed.
A plan represents the flow of operation for a management operation, along with configuration
data, referenced content (firmware, OS image) and default selections.
Depending on its intended purpose, a plan can perform a single operation (configure
firmware, configure hardware RAID, update firmware, provision OS) or a series of operations,
(install a server = provision an OS, followed by performing update operations, etc).
Plans are defined as a series of steps, where each step references either
A profile, or
Another plan
Plans and Profiles:
Overview
Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses plans and profiles to
store defaults for management operations so that they can
be repeatedly used
Plans are composed of one or more steps
Plans can be applied to create jobs
A step represents a logically distinct management operation,
such as provisioning an OS image
Profiles represent a single action in Enterprise Manager
Ops Center with configuration options and settings
Each profile is associated with a wizard in the Browser UI
that allows you to create and edit key values
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Plans and Profiles: Browser UI

Plans, profiles, and policies are all organized under the left-hand Navigation tab labeled Plan
Management. There are three sub-sections in the section; by default, all three are expanded
when the tab is opened.
Deployment Plans: This sub-section lists all deployment plans, grouped according to
functional category (at present, there are 12 categories). Each category provides a template
that you can use to create plans of its type, and you can expand each category to view the
currently defined plans of its type.
Profiles and Policies: This sub-section provides the profiles for the deployment plans,
grouped according to functional area. There is not a 1-1 mapping between profiles and plans,
because some management operations have multiple plan categories. Like deployment
plans, you can expand categories to view the currently defined profiles. There are two
exceptions to this rule: Update Policies and Update Profiles are not shown in the tree view.
You must select the category to view all currently defined elements. (note that policies are
ONLY used for OS Updates; everything else only uses profiles)
Plans and Profiles:
Browser UI
The left-hand Navigation tab named Plan Management
organizes plans and profiles
Plan Management Categories
Deployment Plans:
Plans that perform standard management activities
Profiles and Policies:
Profiles and policies used by the deployment plans
Operational Plans:
Plans and profiles used for asset monitoring, problem
management and remediation
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Plans and Profiles: Browser UI (continued)

Operational Plans: This sub-section provides categories for Monitoring Profiles, Operational
Profiles, and the Problems Knowledge Base. Operational plans are viewable in the top-level
Operational Plans sub-section only, (cannot expand an icon to see the plans) though it IS
possible to expand the three category icons.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Plan Management UI
This slide illustrates the Plan Management navigation tab, along with the three sub-sections.
Since each sub-section is fairly large, the images on the left provide a break-out view of the
categories under each sub-section.
Plan Management UI
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Structure and Creation

This slide introduces deployment plans and the associated concept of profile. It provides a
slightly more in-depth discussion of the concepts.
Plans basically define a series of steps that should be sequentially performed, and an
associated failure policy. Each step is a link to either a version of a policy or a version of a
plan.
Policies consist of a series of settings and default values for a logical operation.
Users can create a deployment plan or profile
Manually (using a template for plans and a wizard for profiles)
By copying another plan or profile
The concept of the plan template basically exists to provide flexibility for plan creation. It
provides a sequence of steps, and the user can decide which steps will be used in the plan
they will create. It is also possible for some steps to be replicated, (example: update
operations for Install Server plans) enabling more complex plans to be created that still
confirm to the requirements of a specific plan type.
Deployment Plans and Profiles
Structure and Creation
Deployment plans automate asset management
A deployment plan consists of one or more steps
Each step references a profile or another plan
When users upload images into an Enterprise Controller
library, Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates a default
profile and plan
This is true for:
OS Provisioning images
Firmware Provisioning images
You can manually create deployment plans and profiles
Plans use pre-defined templates based on the plan category
Profiles use a wizard based on the profile type
You can also copy existing profiles and plans
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Structure and Creation (continued)

In some cases, plans and profiles are automatically generated. Any time a user uploads an
OS or Firmware Provisioning image into an Enterprise Controller library, Enterprise Manager
Ops Center will create a matching profile and plan with default values. All OS Provisioning
plans and profiles have default-profile- as their prefix.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center automatically generates default OS Update profiles and
policies during initial configuration.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Creating a Deployment Plan with a Template

There are two ways to create a template-based plan:
In the Navigation pane select Deployment Plans , then click the Create a Deployment
Plan action (shown here)
In the Navigation pane expand the Deployment Plans node, select a deployment plan
template, then click the Create Plan from Template action
In both cases, you will reach a wizard with template-based steps. This allows you to decide
which steps to perform, to select which targets to use for a step (if appropriate) and to either
select an existing profile or create a new one.
Deployment Plans and Profiles:
Creating a Deployment Plan with a Template
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Copying an Existing Deployment Plan

To copy a deployment plan, select the plan and select the Copy Deployment Plan action.
This will create a copy of the plan with the prefix Copy of added to the name. The copy will
have the same steps, profiles and plan references as the original.
Copying an Existing Deployment Plan
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Creating a Deployment Profile

There are two ways to create a deployment profile:
Navigate to the Profiles and Policies sub-category and select the Create Profile action
(shown here)
Select the category under Profiles and Policies that you want to use and select the
Create Profile action
In all cases, you will reach a wizard for the chosen profile type. The wizard progresses
through several screens that allow you to designate the options and settings for the new
policy. An option in the first screen of the wizard allows you to auto-generate a plan with the
same name as the policy.
Note that OS Update profiles and policies are an exception to these rules:
To create a new OS Update profile, select Update Profiles, then select the New Profile
action or select the New Profile icon in the central region
To create a new OS Update policy, select Update Policies, then select the New Policy
action or select the New Policy icon in the central region
Creating a Deployment Profile
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Copying an Existing Deployment Profile

To copy a deployment profile, select the desired profile and click the Copy Profile action.
This creates a copy of the profile with the prefix Copy of added to the name and
description. The copy will have the profile options and settings as the original.
Note that the Create wizard provides a checkbox that allows you to auto-generate a plan that
references the newly created profile.
Copying an Existing Deployment Profile
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Updating Deployment Plans and Profiles

All deployment plans and profiles are associated with a version number.* When a plan or
profile is first created, it has a version number of 1. Any successive edits increase the version
by 1 each time a save is made. The central Details tab always shows the current version for a
profile or plan.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center automatically saves all versions of plans and profiles.
Version information is available in the central tab Version History, while the Referrers tab
shows what profiles/plans refer to specific versions.
When you update a profile, plans are not automatically updated to reference the new version
number. You must manually update the deployment plan or plans to reference a new version.
The Action tab for deployment plans and profiles includes links to delete the most current
version. It is also possible to delete a specific version of a deployment plan or profile from the
icons in the Version History tab.
When you delete a version of a plan or profile that is referenced elsewhere, a pop-up dialog
warns that references in associated plans or profiles will be removed.
* OS Update policies and profiles are the only exceptions to this rule.
Updating Deployment Plans and Profiles
Updating a deployment profile creates a new version
Updates are sequentially numbered v1, v2, etc.
All updates are shown in the Version History tab
Deployment plans always reference the original version of
the profile
Users must update the deployment plan to reference a
new version of a profile
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Edited Deployment Profiles

The Version History tab in this slide shows two versions of a profile. The Delete Version
action would allow a user to delete the most current version of the profile. (version 2 in this
example)
You could also select a version in the central tab and either view the version details or delete
the selected version.
Edited Deployment Profiles
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Deployment Plans and Profiles: Updating Deployment Plans

To update a plan, select the Edit Deployment Plan action. This allows you to select a more
recent version of a profile, and will also create a new version of the plan.
Updating Deployment Plans
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Enterprise Manager Ops Center allows you to apply a deployment plan in three ways from the
BUI:
From Deployment Plan menus
- Summary Screen: Navigate to the plan you want, then select the targets
- Specific Plan Action menu: Select the targets
From Asset menus: Select the plan, filtered by the action type
When running a plan from the asset menu, Enterprise Manager Ops Center automatically
narrows the available plans based on the action type. For instance, if you select the Install
Server action for a system, you will see Deployment Plans of type Install Server and
Provision OS filtered for their system architecture. (SPARC or X86)
As mentioned, the wizard allows you to select to run with minimal interaction, or to override
any profile values. The former option will only show configuration screens that require user
input, while the latter will show all configuration screens and allow you to modify field values.
Applying a deployment plan creates a job to run the plan
There are three places in the Browser UI to apply a plan:
The deployment plans summary screen allows you to select
and apply any deployment plan
The deployment plan action menu allows you to apply a
selected plan
The Asset or Group action menu allows you to apply plans of
a selected type
There are two options to apply a plan:
Minimal interaction: Shows profile screens that require input
Override any profile values: Shows all profile screens
Each step in the plan becomes a task in the running job
Each task is associated with one or more targets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Applying Deployment Plans: Deployment Plans Summary Screen

This screen allows you to select any deployment plan. Navigate by plan category in the
central region, select the desired plan, and click the Apply icon to open a wizard.
Applying Deployment Plans:
Deployment Plans Summary Screen
Apply icon
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Applying Deployment Plans: Deployment Plan Action Link

This screen allows you to apply a specific deployment plan. Use the left-hand links to
navigate to your plan, then select the Apply Deployment Plan action to open the wizard.
Deployment Plan Action Link
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Applying Deployment Plans: Asset or Group Action Link

In this scenario, you first select the managed asset or assets to which you want to apply the
plan. This qualifies the available management actions, which typically appear in the Organize
or Update sections of the Action pane.
When you apply plans in this way, you will have an additional step in the wizard that allows
you to select which plan to apply. In the target selection screen, the asset or assets
referenced by the action link will be automatically selected, though you can still add or remove
assets from the selected list.
Asset or Group Action Link
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Applying Deployment Plans: Deployment Plan Wizard

After the target selection panel, you will see a summary panel that allows you to choose how
to apply the plan. (minimal interaction or override)
Once you click Apply Plan, a second pop-up wizard will appear that walks you through any
settings that you must (or can) set prior to creating the job.
Deployment Plan Wizard
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Operational Plans
The Enterprise Manager Ops Center BUI defines three sub-categories for Operational Plans.
The sub-categories represent entities that are used separately from the Deployment Plans.
Specifically, all subcategories are used (or can be used) to manage problems in Enterprise
Manager Ops Center.
The top-level category (Operational Plans) is both the root of this section and the organizing
place for operational plans. An operational plan links to an operational profile, and is used to
execute scripts.
Monitoring Profiles represent the collection of settings used to monitor assets. At time of
installation, Enterprise Manager Ops Center has default monitoring profiles for all categories
of monitored asset.
Operational Profiles are matched with operational plans to support script execution. Each
operational profile references a script, variables, timeout, and execution target.
The Problems Knowledge Base holds annotations from past problems in Enterprise
Manager Ops Center. By default, categories exist for each type of managed asset. You can
add notes or scripts to the knowledgebase section for the asset that generated the problem.
Operational Plans
Operational plans consist of three sub-categories:
monitoring profiles, operational profiles and problems
knowledge base
Monitoring Profiles provide rules to monitor assets
Defaults are automatically created at installation
You can export or manually create new profiles
Operational Profiles reference scripts
Run on the Enterprise Controller or OS agents
Variables can be defined and values added at runtime
Problems Knowledge Base contains notes for problems
Problems are generated when an asset triggers an alert
Organized according to asset type
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Monitoring Profiles
In the Navigation pane, expanding the Monitoring Profiles sub-category will show icons for
user-defined profiles (always shown first) and default profiles (always prefixed with OC .
From the top-level, you can create new profiles, edit or copy profiles.
More detail will be provided about monitoring profiles and how to use them in lesson 7,
Managing and Monitoring Assets using Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
Monitoring Profiles
A monitoring profile is a set of alert monitoring rules that
determines what conditions will trigger a problem
Default profiles are created based on asset type
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Problems Knowledge Base

Expanding the Problems Knowledge Base sub-category shows categories for problem
organization. When you add annotations (comments or actions) to a problem, you can
optionally add their information to the knowledge base. If you choose to do so, the annotation
will automatically be added to the category of the asset experiencing the problem.
More detail will be provided about the problems knowledge base and how to use it in lesson
18, Managing Problems, Service Requests and Notifications using Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
Problems Knowledge Base
The problems knowledge base provides notes and
suggested actions for previous problems with assets
Organized according to asset category
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Operational Plans and Profiles: Overview

An operational profile references a script.
At time of creation, an operational profile flags a script for execution in one of two places: on
the Enterprise Controller or on a remote asset (in other words, on an OS or virtualized OS
instance)
There is no way to automatically create an operational plan or profile you must create one
using the wizard.
IMPORTANT: Enterprise Manager Ops Center does not verify, check or validate scripts that
are used in an operational plan. As such, it is important for customers to verify that scripts
work as intended before adding them to an operational profile
IMPORTANT: By default, Enterprise Manager Ops Center runs scripts as the root user.
Execution privileges are based on permissions for a group containing the script.
Administrators should be aware of these facts when deciding how to use operational plans
and setting up execution permissions.
Operational Plans and Profiles:
Overview
Operational profiles reference a script
Scripts can be either be executed by the
Enterprise Controller (EC Shell)
Remote OS Asset (Remote Shell)
Operational plans and profiles must be created using the
wizard
Scripts can be uploaded or typed into the region
Scripts can reference standard Enterprise Manager Ops
Center variables
Scripts can also define variables of their own
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Operational Plans and Profiles: Creating a New Operational Plan

As with deployment plans, you can either create an operational plan or profile first.
To create an operational plan, select the top-level Operational Plans Category and select the
Create Operational Plan action. This opens a pop-up dialog wizard that will enable you to
generate the plan.
During plan creation, it is possible to set the failure policy, and to associate an operational
profile with the plan. You can either create a new policy or select one from a drop-down list.
Creating a New Operational Plan
Select the
Operational Plans
category
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Operational Plans and Profiles: Script and Variable Definition

You can run the Operational Profile wizard either from the Operational Profiles sub-category,
or as a sub-wizard from Operational Plan creation. In both cases, the wizard has four panels:
Identify Profile: Select the name and type of asset associated with the script
Script: Input the script and specify key runtime settings
Specify Additional Variables: Add variables if required
Summary: View the settings of the script and finalize creation
The second and third panels are the most significant in script creation. The Script
panel lets you select the target for the script (either Remote or EC Shell) and the
timeout.
The Specify Additional Variables panel allows you to define variables for the script.
You can use the $VARIABLE notation in the script, then define the matching
VARIABLE with settings in the panel.
Script and Variable Definition
Script panel
Specify Additional
Variables panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Operational Plans and Profiles: Job Execution

There are two ways to execute an operational plan:
As a standalone script: The plan runs directly on an asset (a standard management
action) through
- The operational plan tab in the BUI
- The Action tab labeled Execute Action at the OS and virtual instance level
As an action to fix a problem: In this case, the plan runs either as part of the problem
management process, or associated with the problems knowledge base
In either scenario, Enterprise Manager Ops Center opens a pop-up dialog wizard to run the
plan. You can add a value to any variables. When you complete the wizard, Enterprise
Manager Ops Center creates a job based on the plan.
The job runs with the defined timeout and failure policy on the targeted asset(s). Final
success or failure of the job is based on a 1-0, success-fail value for script execution.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides the standard output and standard error streams
from script execution in the job logs.
STILL IMPORTANT: By default, Enterprise Manager Ops Center runs scripts as the root
user. Execution privileges are based on permissions for a group containing the script.
Job Execution
You can execute operational plans:
As standalone scripts
As an action to fix a problem
Applying an operational plan creates a job that runs the script
on the target system or systems
Scripts execute as the Enterprise Manager Ops Center
process owner on the target system (default of the root user)
You can run a plan on an asset if you have Manage
permissions for a group that includes the asset
Job results are based on a success-fail value for script
execution
Job results include the standard output and standard error
streams (stdout, stderr)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Operational Plans and Profiles: Applying an Operational Plan to Execute a Script

The examples on this slide show script execution by directly applying an operational plan.
First, navigate to Operational Plans section and select the script from the central region. Next,
click the Apply Plan button to open the pop-up dialog wizard.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center will first prompt the you to select one or more targets for the
plan. The next screen will allow you to add or override values for variables. The final screen
will summarize the script settings and allow you to apply the plan.
Applying an Operational Plan to Execute a Script
Apply Plan button
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Operational Plans and Profiles: Job Execution and Results

After applying an operational plan in the wizard, Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates a job
to represent the plan execution on the asset(s).
Use the standard navigation controls at the bottom of the Web browser to view job progress.
When a job is complete, you can navigate through the job screens to the event logs of a
specific target. This screen will show the detailed job results but more importantly will
provide information from stdout and stderr.
As with any Enterprise Manager Ops Center job, it is possible to download these detailed
results in text format by using the Export Logs button.
Job Execution and Results
Export Logs button
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: b
Quiz
True or False: Plans in Enterprise Manager Ops Center
consist only of profiles.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a, c, d
Quiz
Which of these items are associated with the three sub-
categories of Operational Plans?
a. Monitoring Profiles
b. Deployment Profiles
c. Operational Profiles
d. Problems Knowledge Base
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: e
Quiz
A deployment plan can consist of which of the following items?
a. OS provisioning profiles
b. Firmware profiles
c. Additional plans
d. Operational plans
e. All of the above
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Summary
Navigate the Plan Management section in the Browser UI
Describe the purpose of each section in the Plan
Management tab
View a deployment plan and its associated profile
Create a deployment plan and profile
Update the settings in a profile, and update the associated
deployment plan to reference a new profile version
Apply a deployment plan in Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
Use a script to create an operational plan and profile
Apply an operational plan in Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Using Profiles and Plans
Configuring DHCP Services
Viewing the details of a deployment plan and its
associated profile
Modifying an existing deployment profile and updating its
associated plan
Creating an operational profile to execute a script and
associating it with an operational plan
Running an operational plan within Enterprise Manager
Ops Center
Viewing the results of the job run by the operational plan
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Managing and Monitoring Assets
Using Oracle Enterprise Manager
Ops Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Objectives
This lesson focuses on asset management capabilities in Enterprise Manager Ops Center. It
picks up where Lesson 4 - Discovering Assets leaves off covering the following topics:
How to manage assets that have been discovered
How to manually install and configure agents
What management and monitoring functions are available after management
How to use the Dashboard
How to use views and groups to manage a number of assets
The lesson provides background on the basic features associated with management and
monitoring. It describes the foundation capabilities that users get after managing any asset.
Objectives
Understand principles of asset management and
monitoring using Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Manage discovered hardware, OS and virtual assets
Manually install and configure Enterprise Manager Ops
Center agents
Manage and monitor Enterprise Manager Ops Center
assets
Use Dashboards to view asset information and navigate in
Use standard asset views to filter assets by type
Create and manage user defined groups
Unmanage and delete assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Objectives (Continued)
Since this lesson covers management and monitoring features, it mentions topics that will
be covered in greater detail in the following lessons:
OS Management: Lesson 10, Update Management using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
Asset Monitoring: Lesson 15, Managing Problems, Service Requests and Notifications
using Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Managing Assets

In order to perform management operations on assets, users must perform two operations
Discover assets (from Lesson 4)
Manage discovered assets
Enterprise Manager Ops Center allows users to manage assets listed in the Available to be
Managed tab in other words, assets (hardware or OS instances) that have been discovered
using login credentials. Authentication credentials have a 1-hour timeout, so it is necessary to
provide credentials again if time has elapsed between initial discovery and management.
Management is different for hardware assets and OS assets. For hardware, management
merely involves saving authentication credentials and updating the status of the asset in the
Enterprise Controller. For OS and virtual assets, agent software must be installed before the
asset can be managed.
Asset Management and Monitoring
Managing Assets
Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides two ways to
manage assets
Discovery, using one of the methods from Lesson 4
Manual agent installation and configuration
After discovery, users can manage any asset identified in
the Available to be Managed tab
Assets have a 1-hour password timeout
Global zones must be managed before their non-global
zones (virtual OS guests)
Systems: Identify the system as managed
OS Instances: Install an agent, then identify the instance as
managed
Manual agent setup configures OS assets without discovery
and management from the Enterprise Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Managing Assets (continued)

As an alternative to discovery, users can manually install and configure OS agents. In this
case, the configuration of agent software removes the need to perform EC-based discovery
and management.
As noted in the slide, Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires a global zone to be managed
before managing its non-global zones.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Available to be Managed Assets

Assets that have been discovered but not yet managed will appear in the available to be
managed tab, but also in the main Asset views. Unmanaged assets will appear in blue,
indicating that they have not yet been managed.
It is possible to view an unmanaged asset in Enterprise Manager Ops Center, but it will not
provide full information or management capabilities. If a users views such an asset, a dialog
box in the center pane will indicate that the asset is unmanaged, and that the user must
manage the asset for full functionality to be available.
One possible way to manage an asset is to select it within an Assets navigation panel, and
click the Manage Asset(s) action. It is also possible to manage assets directly from the
Available to be Managed tab.
Asset Management
Available to be Managed Assets
Assets in the Available to be Managed tab show up in the
All Assets tree in blue
Discovering a global zone will also show non-global zones
Basic information
for an asset is
available at
discovery time
Managing an asset
enables monitoring
and management Available to be
managed assets
Unmanaged asset
indicator
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Available to be Managed Assets Tab

The Available to be Managed Assets tab provides a convenient way to manage many assets.
The tab is available from the Assets > All Assets navigation view. From this view, perform
the following steps to manage one or more assets:
1. Click the Available to be Managed Assets tab
2. Select the asset(s) to be managed (shift and control keys can be used for multi-select
capability
3. Click the manage asset button (the button with the green check icon above the asset
view)
Asset Management
Available to be Managed Assets Tab
Select one or more assets,
then click the manage button
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Manage Asset Wizard for OS Assets

When users manage hardware assets, Enterprise Manager Ops Center will automatically
update their status to managed state. (assuming the password values are still within the 1-
hour timeout window)
For OS assets, users enter values in the Manage Asset Wizard to start the Agent provisioning
job and manage the assets.
The wizard allows users to specify login credentials for the OS asset(s). There are three ways
to do this:
1. Re-use the values used during discovery. This will only work if the assets are within the
1-hour timeout window and the root login credentials were used during discovery
2. Use a common set of SSH credentials for all OS assets
3. Specify login credentials for each asset to be managed
Enterprise Manager Ops Center requires root login capabilities in order to install the agent
software on the target systems.
Asset Management
Manage Asset Wizard for OS Assets
Select to use the
credentials from discovery
Select to input login
credentials for all assets
Select to specify login
credentials for each asset
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Agent Provisioning Job in the UI

Completing the Manage Asset Wizard will run an Agent-Provision job in Enterprise Manager
Ops Center. This job will install, configure, and test the agent software installation on all OS
assets selected for management.
While the job runs,
the asset(s) will appear in blue with a lock icon to indicate they are unavailable
for Enterprise Manager Ops Center operations
all action links for the OS asset(s) will be disabled during the job
Selecting the job will provide a running status on the agent provisioning. Selecting individual
agents will provide additional details about the agent provision job.
Asset Management
Agent Provisioning Job in the UI
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Agent Provisioning Job Details

The agent provisioning job performs the following actions:
1. Copy the appropriate agent bundle to the target OS instance
2. Unzip the software bundle
3. Run the install script to install the agent
4. Perform configuration to register the agent with a Proxy and the EC, and to start the
agent
5. Check the connectivity between the agent and Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Asset Management
Agent Provisioning Job Details
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Managed Asset after Agent Provisioning

Once the agent provisioning job completes, the OS asset will appear in black font in the Asset
view regions. Browsing to the OS instance will show all available data, and control actions will
be enabled.
Note that it can take some time after the job completes before an OS asset is fully patchable.
This is because Enterprise Manager Ops Center must perform the following actions after the
job completes:
1. The agent must determine the OS and version and report the information to the EC
2. The EC must download patching metadata for the OS and version, if not already
available
3. The agent must collect information about the OS patch state and report that to the EC
Asset Management
Managed OS Asset After Agent Provisioning
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Manual Agent Installation: Overview

As an alternative to EC-based discovery and management, users can manually install and
configure the agent software. As with discovery-based management, users must first
configure global zones before installing agent software on non-global zones.
Three versions of the agent installer are available:
Linux
Solaris X86
Solaris SPARC
They are located on the EC in the repository directory
/var/opt/sun/xvm/images/agent.
When Enterprise Manager Ops Center is updated, new versions of the agent software may be
added to this directory. Enterprise Manager Ops Center keeps the original versions of the
agent software to allow rollback. The starting version number for the OEM 11g release is
1536.
Manual Agent Installation
Overview
Manual installation and configuration can be performed on
OS assets and Solaris Zones
Removes the need for EC discovery and management
Users must first manage the global zone before setting up
agents on non-global zones
Agent installation bundles are located on the Enterprise
Controller in /var/opt/sun/xvm/images/agent
SunConnectionAgent.Linux.i686.<version>.zip
SunConnectionAgent.SunOS.i386.<version>.zip
SunConnectionAgent.SunOS.sparc.<version>.zip
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Manual Agent Installation: Agent Installation and Configuration

The manual agent installation process is similar to that of the agent-provision job.
1. (Optional) Use OCDoctor.sh to check compatibility. The --agent-prereq test
will evaluate the target OS, and determine whether it meets the base requirements
for agent installation.
2. Copy the agent installation bundle
3. Unzip the agent bundle
4. Run the installation script. This action must be performed as the root user, as
installation will involve package or RPM installation
5. Run the configuration script for the agent, to associate the agent with a Proxy
controller and start the agent
Agent Installation and Configuration
1. Use the OCDoctor.sh script to check compatibility
# /var/opt/sun/xvm/OCDoctor/OCDoctor.sh
--agent-prereq
2. Copy the agent installation bundle from
/var/opt/sun/xvm/images/agent to the target OS
3. Unzip the installation bundle on the target OS
# unzip SunConnectionAgent*.zip
4. Run the script from the installation bundle
# ./SunConnectionAgent/install
5. Run the agentadm configure script
Solaris: /opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm configure
Linux: /opt/sun/xvmoc/bin/agentadm configure
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Manual Agent Installation: Agent Install Script Options

In most cases, it is adequate to run the agent installer without arguments. This will install the
agent software and log output to the /var/scn/install/log file.
There are a few optional flags that can be specified. The a flag forces installation of all
packages or RPMs; if a package is already present, it will re-install. The n flag will perform a
dry-run installation, documenting what WILL be done during actual installation without making
changes. The v flag provides verbose output for the installation. Finally, the R flag allows
installation to an alternate root; typically, this is done as part of a finish script operation during
OS provisioning.
Agent Install Script Options
To run the agent installer script, execute
./SunConnectionAgent/install [options]
Installer output is logged to /var/scn/install/log
Installation script options
-a Reinstall package when same version is installed
-n Describe what would be done, but do not make
changes
-v Verbosely describe what is being done
-R <root> Install to an alternate root (provisioning finish
scripts)
After the script completes, the agent software will be
installed but unconfigured
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Manual Agent Installation: agentadm Command

The agentadm script allows users to configure and start the Enterprise Manager Ops Center
agent. This script
Registers the agent with a Proxy Controller (and by extension, with the Enterprise
Controller)
Configures the agent software (specifically, generates and exchanges SSH keys and
sets up the cacao communication infrastructure)
Starts all agent processes
The script is interactive, requiring a user to approve the SSH key exchange. By default, the
script will echo all output to the console. Users can specify the option o flag if they would like
to designate a file for the configuration output.
agentadm Command
After the install script completes, execute agentadm to
Register the agent with a Proxy Controller
Fully configure the agent software
Start the agent processes
Agentadm configuration script options
/opt/SUNWxvmoc/bin/agentadm configure [options]
By default, agentadm will echo output to the console
(stdout and stderr)
It is possible to use the o argument to designate an
output file for the configuration
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Manual Agent Installation: Required agentadm Configuration Arguments

The agentadmconfiguration script requires two pieces of information:
The proxy controller that will manage the agent (-x flag)
The authentication credentials of an Enterprise Manager Ops Center user with
administrative privileges (the -u/-p or -t flags)
Users can either specify login credentials directly, or use a registration token. In the former
case, the user would create a file with the administrative password, and designate the full
path to the file during registration. The file is only required during the configuration process,
and could be deleted immediately after agent set-up.
Token-based authentication does not use user login credentials; instead, it uses a public key
token generated by a Proxy Controller during configuration stored in the file
/var/opt/sun/xvm/persistence/scn-proxy/connection.properties
To use this method, users would copy the auto-reg-token value into a file and perform the
following edits:
1. Change the property name to autoregToken
2. Remove backslash characters from the value
Required agentadm Configuration Arguments
At a minimum, agentadm requires
The Proxy Controller that will manage the asset
Authentication credentials for Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Required configuration flags
-x <Proxy> IP address or name of Proxy Controller
-u <user> Administrator user for EC
-p <passwd> Full path to password file for the EC user
-t <token> Full path to token file
Authentication files are only needed during configuration
Token file uses Proxy auto-reg-token value from
/var/opt/sun/xvm/persistence/scn-proxy/
connection.properties (no backslash characters)
autoregToken=999a6972-5224-4b0e-9eb4-
f0005b4fbf3f:1339826400000:T
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Manual Agent Installation: Optional agentadm Configuration Arguments

In addition to the required arguments, agentadm provides a number of optional command
flags:
The a flag allows users to specify the IP address to be used by the agent for
communication
The k flag keeps the communication information for the agent, allowing it to be
reconfigured with the same settings
The o flag allows a user to specify an output file for logging
The v flag is used to specify the level of verbosity when logging output. This flag can
be used multiple times to increase the verbosity level
Users can perform non-interactive configuration on an agent by using the pipe character | to
provide a yes response when prompted during configuration.
Optional agentadm Configuration Arguments
The agentadm script provides several optional arguments
for agent configuration and unconfiguration
Optional configuration flags
-a <agent IP> IP address to use for agent
-k Keep connection (for reconfiguration)
-o <file> Log output to designated file
-v Provide verbose output (levels 1, 2 & 3)
For non-interactive agent installation, use the command
# yes | agentadm configure [options]
Agentadm unconfigure removes an agent from Enterprise
Manager Ops Center without removing the agent software
from the OS instance
# ./agentadm unconfigure [-k]
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Manual Agent Installation: Agent Configuration Using agentadm

The screen shot shows some of the output provided when running the agentadm
configure command.
Agent Configuration Using agentadm
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Manual Agent Installation: Manual Agent Configuration Results in the UI

When manual agent configuration completes, the result in the BUI is the same as if the agent
were discovered and managed through the Enterprise Controller. Shortly after the agentadm
script completes, the Enterprise Manager Ops Center BUI will refresh displaying the agent in
the Assets tree in a managed state. The asset will appear in black, asset data will be
available, and control actions will be enabled.
Manual Agent Configuration Results in the UI
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Agent Configuration: Agent Configuration for the EC and Proxy

The Enterprise and Proxy Controllers automatically install agent software. As a result, users
do not need to install the software; instead, the Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides
configuration options in the Administration tab.
For the Enterprise Controller, users select the Configure Local Agent action; this runs a job
that will enable the agent software for both the Enterprise Controller and its co-located Proxy
Controller.
For remote Proxy Controllers, users will select the desired Proxy Controller and click
Configure Agent on Proxy action.
Agent Configuration
Agent Configuration for the EC and Proxy
The Enterprise Controller and Proxy Controllers have
agent software installed by default
To enable the Enterprise Controller agent
1. Navigate to the Administration tab
2. Select the Enterprise Controller icon
3. Select the Configure Local Agent action
To enable a Proxy Controller agent
1. Navigate to the Administration tab
2. Select the icon for the desired Proxy Controller
3. Select the Configure Agent on Proxy action
Configuring the agent on the Enterprise Controller will also
enable to agent for a co-located Proxy Controller
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Agent Configuration: Configuring the EC Agent in the UI

This screen shot shows the process to activate the agent on the Enterprise Controller.
Selecting the action opens a pop-up confirmation dialog that will run the configuration job
when approved. The process is the same for remote Proxy Controllers; selecting the action
will open a confirmation dialog which runs a configuration job upon approval.
Agent Configuration
Configuring the EC Agent in the UI
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Overview

Managing an asset automatically enabled management and monitoring capabilities by default.
The level of management and monitoring support will be determined by Enterprise Manager
Ops Center based on the asset capabilities and management method used.
Management operations perform control functions on an asset, and allow deployment plans to
be run.
Monitoring operations collect data from an asset, which is displayed in the UI. Additionally,
some of the monitored data is associated with properties in an alert monitoring profile; in this
case, monitored data can trigger alerts, which are reported to users as Problems and
Notifications. (more detail is available on these topics in Lesson 15)
Overview
After an asset has been managed, Enterprise Manager
Ops Center enables management and monitoring
capabilities
Management
Allows users to perform control functions on the asset
Allows deployment plans to be applied, performing
provisioning or update actions
Capabilities depend on the type of asset and level of
management
Monitoring
Tracks information about an asset
Some values are used to trigger alerts
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Hardware Management and Monitoring

As mentioned in the previous slide, the level of support for management and monitoring
depends on the capabilities of the managed asset and the management method used by
Enterprise Manager Ops Center.
This is especially important for hardware assets such as systems. When an OS asset is
managed, Enterprise Manager Ops Center will also manage the associated system. Since the
system is monitored and managed through the OS interface, there will only be a reduced set
of capabilities available. Systems must typically be monitored through the SP interface in
order to provide support for the more in-depth operations, such as
Lights-out management
Firmware provisioning
Sensor and component-level monitoring
If a user wishes to use these management operations, they can re-discover a system asset
using the SP credentials. When this is done, Enterprise Manager Ops Center will
automatically increase the support provided to that associated with SP management.
Hardware Management and Monitoring
Hardware management and monitoring depends on the
type of asset and management method
Systems must generally be managed through the Service
Processor (SP) for full management and monitoring
Lights-Out Management
Firmware Provisioning
Sensor and component-level monitoring
Systems managed through the OS interface have reduced
capabilities
Manual OS Provisioning
Limited monitoring capabilities
Re-discovering hardware through the SP interface
promotes it to a higher level of management
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Hardware Management and Monitoring

(continued)
Note: Enterprise Manager Ops Center can also manage virtual OS guests that use other
technologies. Examples include Oracle VM for X86, Virtual Box, and VMWare. In these cases,
the system asset created by Enterprise Manager Ops Center represents the hardware
interface of the virtual OS guest. The asset will be displayed as Generic Server and will
provide very basic information only.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: System Capabilities (OS Management)

The screen shot shows a system managed through the OS interface. General information is
available about the system, and management capabilities are limited to
Enterprise Manager Ops Center-hosted functions (group management, limited
monitoring, script execution)
Manual OS provisioning
System Capabilities (OS Management)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: System Capabilities (SP Management)

Rediscovery of the system through its SP increases the management and monitoring
capabilities available through Enterprise Manager Ops Center. More detailed information
about the system becomes available, and the asset supports additional management
capabilities:
Automated OS provisioning
Firmware updates
Lights-out management (if supported by the system)
Energy management (if supported by the system)
Detailed monitoring
System Capabilities (SP Management)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Monitored System Data (SP Management)

When a system is managed through the SP, detailed monitoring data is often available. The
monitor values are organized in the Hardware tab of the asset. Depending on the monitoring
capabilities of the asset, this tab may show all monitored data in a single table, or may break
the data into components of the server. (as in this screen shot)
Some monitored data is associated with threshold values. This information is defined by
system type and used by Enterprise Manager Ops Center monitoring profiles to trigger alerts.
Monitored System Data (SP Management)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: OS Management and Monitoring

Managed OS instances provide reboot, patching and monitor capabilities. Its also possible to
manage global resources associated with an OS, such as network interfaces and shared
storage.
Solaris instances can also provide additional management capabilities:
Live Upgrade/Alternate Boot Environments: Displayed if present, ability to patch ABEs,
synchronize boot environments, and activate a specific boot environment
Oracle Solaris Zones: Ability to create, manage and monitor non-global zones (including
whole root, sparse root, and Solaris-based branded zones)
Oracle VM Server for SPARC (Logical Domains): Ability to create, manage and monitor
OVMSS guest OS instances if the server supports OVMSS technology and the OS
instance was provisioned by Enterprise Manager Ops Center as a control domain
OS Management and Monitoring
Solaris and Linux instances provide the following
management and monitoring capabilities
Reboot
OS Update
Monitoring (Solaris and Linux)
Solaris OS instances also provide the following capabilities
Manage alternate boot environments (if present)
Create and manage Oracle Solaris zones
Manage OVMSS guests (if the Solaris instance was
provisioned as a standalone OVMSS control domain)
Monitor data provides data about the OS instance; Solaris
instances also report information about any zones
(managed and unmanaged)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: OS Management and Monitoring (continued)

Note: Windows OS instances also support limited management and monitoring capabilities.
In order to discover and manage a Windows instance, it must be a supported version and
must have remote WMI protocol enabled. For instances discovered and managed through
Enterprise Manager Ops Center, basic monitor data is available, and patching is supported
when Enterprise Manager Ops Center is paired with a Microsoft SCCM server.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: OS Capabilities

An OS instance managed by Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides monitored data and
the following control functions:
Reboot
Zone creation and management (Solaris 10 only with supported base version)
Manage networks and shared storage libraries
Run a script
Manage boot environments (Solaris using live upgrade)
Update and patch the OS instance
OS Capabilities
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Monitored OS Data (Summary)

OS instances provide a number of screens with monitored data. The Summary screen
provides some of the most commonly monitored data (CPU and memory utilization) as well as
zone control functions for Solaris instances.
Monitored OS Data (Summary)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Monitored OS Data (Utilization)

The Utilization tab provides the full monitored data available for the OS. This is available in a
tree view with entries for
CPU utilization
Memory utilization
Swap utilization
Network bandwidth utilization
File system utilization
System load
I/O utilization
Kernel Statistics
Process Statistics
For Solaris instances with zones, detailed data will be available for the kernel, zones, global,
and total. Information is also available in charts. The OS asset also provides a dedicated
Charts tab which allows download of the monitor data.
Monitored OS Data (Utilization)
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Dashboard View of Assets

Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center introduced the concept of the dashboard to provide a
graphical and chart-based view of key data associated with managed assets. Dashboard
views are available for individual assets, for asset views and groups, and for network
resources.
A dashboard provides a graphical breakdown of key data. The dashboard provides floating
text with details about a selected item, the ability to quickly view the health and status of
assets and links, the ability to view problem summaries, and the ability to quickly navigate to
other parts of the Enterprise Manager Ops Center BUI.
Dashboard View of Assets
The Dashboard view provides a graphical and chart-based
summary data about managed assets
Capabilities
Floating text provides detail on the selected item
Double-click on an icon to navigate to the item
Link health and status, where applicable
Graphical view of problems, if any exist
Dashboard views are available for
All Assets view
Individual assets
Groups of assets
Networks
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Dashboard View for All Assets

The All Assets dashboard view appears by default when a user logs into Enterprise Manager
Ops Center. This view provides the following four key regions:
All Assets vs. Managed Assets: The breakdown of managed assets compared to the
total number of discovered assets
Managed Asset Composition: The population breakdown of managed assets according
to type (server, OS, zone, etc)
Top 10 Smart Groups: Breakdown of standard Enterprise Manager Ops Center groups
with the most managed assets
Proxy Managed Asset Composition: Breakdown by proxy according to the total number
of managed assets
Dashboard View for All Assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Dashboard View for a Single Asset

Selecting an asset provides the dashboard view associated with it. The top section provides
general data associated with the asset: its name, description, tags, health and state, total run
time, etc.
The membership graph provides a navigable graphical view of the asset, its categories, and
any managed assets associated with it. The asset itself always appears in the middle of the
graph. The icons which appear above represent the global resources associated with the
asset, (such as networks) the group to which the asset belongs (such as Solaris 10), and any
parent assets which associated with the asset. (such as a server used to run an OS instance)
Assets which appear below are children assets, such as the non-global zones associated with
a Solaris 10 global zone.
Users can click and drag the view in cases where there are a large number of icons in the
view. Resting the mouse on an icon displays a detail bubble with information associated with
the asset. Double clicking on an asset navigates to it within the Enterprise Manager Ops
Center BUI. Control buttons in the upper right-hand corner of the graph allow the user to
navigate to the previous screen, orient the view (top, bottom, right or left), select the display
depth (1 or 2) and refresh the display.
Dashboard View for a Single Asset
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Dashboard View for a Single Asset

(continued)
Below the membership graph is a status screen which provides summary data on any
problems associated with the asset.
OS assets have a reports section below the membership graph that summarizes any
compliance reports run on the OS instance.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management and Monitoring: Dashboard View of a Managed Network

Like an asset, a managed network first provides a summary region on the dashboard page.
This section provides general information about the network and its characteristics.
The membership graph provides a summary of assets associated with the network. The
network link status is provided as a color value.
Below the membership graph, the status section provides a summary of unassigned problems
associated with network assets.
Dashboard View of a Managed Network
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: Overview

Enterprise Manager Ops Center lets users perform bulk operations on assets and view
aggregate data about assets using groups and views. Groups also allow administrators to
assign role-based permissions to users, restricting what operations those users can perform.
By default, Enterprise Manager Ops Center maintains six high-level views of assets that are
organized hierarchically to a number of groups. The standard views divide managed assets
according to category:
All assets (everything, organized in a parent-child hierarchy)
Operating systems (OS instances and virtual guests)
Servers (system-based assets)
Chassis (chassis-based assets, including the server assets they manage)
The resource management views
Virtual pools (collections of associated OVMSS control domains, including the guests
that they manage)
Solaris clusters (clustered assets, based around OS instances and Solaris zones)
Beyond these categories, users can create groups of their own.
Asset Grouping
Overview
Groups and views allow users to manage multiple assets, and
to define role-based permissions on a set of assets
Enterprise Manager Ops Center provides the following default
views of assets
Standard Views
All Assets
Operating Systems
Servers
Chassis
Resource Management Views
Virtual Pools
Solaris Clusters
Users can also create their own groups, which can be
Rule-based or statically defined
Organized in a hierarchy, if desired
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: Standard Views of Assets

The Assets navigation tab provides views of the Enterprise Manager Ops Center assets.
Upon login, Enterprise Manager Ops Center will display the All Assets view. Selecting the
pull-down list directly below Assets allows a user to select one of the other standard views,
and to view the User-Defined Groups.
Asset Grouping
Standard Views of Assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: Operating System View of Assets

The Operating System view is a representative view of assets. The view displays the subset
of Enterprise Manager Ops Center assets associated with OS instances and virtual guests. It
organizes these assets into standard groups according to OS type (Oracle Enterprise Linux,
Oracle Linux, Red Hat Enterprise Linux, SUSE Linux, Solaris) and version. (Solaris 10,
Solaris 9)
Selecting a group displays all of the assets associated with the group. Enterprise Manager
Ops Center displays both managed and manageable assets, with manageable assets
appearing in blue. Selecting a group provides a dashboard summary of the assets and data
associated with the group.
Control actions defined at the group level will perform an action on all members of a group.
This allows a user with appropriate permissions to perform bulk operations, such as a group-
wide OS update.
Asset Grouping
Operating System View of Assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: Server View of Assets

Like the OS view, the server view subdivides the system assets according to a number of
predefined groups. These groups define the architecture (SPARC, X86) and type (M-Series,
U-Class, V-Class) of server.
Selecting a group displays a dashboard view of the group constituents, and provides
summary data about group members. Again, actions performed at the group level affect all
members of the group, allowing a user with appropriate permissions to perform a bulk
operation such as a firmware update on all members of the group.
Asset Grouping
Server View of Assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: User-Defined Groups

Enterprise Manager Ops Center allows users to create groups of their own. In this way,
Enterprise Manager Ops Center users can manage their own collections of assets. An asset
can belong to multiple groups, allowing it to be viewed or managed in different ways or by
different groups.
Groups can be created as top-level resources, or defined in a hierarchy. In the latter case, the
higher level groups contain the assets in all of the lower groups. (example: a datacenter group
might have subgroups to define the servers and OS instances; the datacenter group would
then include all servers and all OS instances for that datacenter)
Groups can also be configured to use rule-based criteria to define group members, and to
include explicitly specified assets. Rule-based groups are automatically updated. If a new
asset is managed that fits the criteria specified in the group, the asset will automatically be
added. (the groups in the default views work this way) Likewise, changing the rules
associated with a group will automatically update the groups composition.
Asset Grouping
User-Defined Groups
To create groups, select All Assets action Create Group
Assets can belong to one or many groups
Options for groups
Top-level or nested
Rule-based or manually configured
Rule-based groups will automatically update the assets
within a group based on
Rules updates
Newly discovered assets
Actions for the group members include
Editing the group characteristics
Managing the assets within the group
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: Creating User-Defined Groups (Step 1: configure group)

Users create a group within Enterprise Manager Ops Center by selecting the Assets
navigation view, and choosing the Create Group action. This opens the Configure/Modify
Group wizard.
The first screen allows users to specify the group name and basic characteristics about the
group. These options include group location (top-level, or nested), whether the group will be
rule-based, whether Enterprise Manager Ops Center should proceed to configure sub-groups,
and whether Enterprise Manager Ops Center should provide a view of group members before
creation.
Asset Grouping
Creating User-Defined Groups
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: Creating User-Defined Groups (Step 2: configure asset type

rules)
If a user decides to create a rule-based group, the next screen allows them to define the rules
used to determine assets included in the group.
The UI allows a user to define one or more rules, with one or more conditions. For each rule,
assets can be added to the group if any or all conditions are met. Each rule is associated with
an asset type (Operating System, Global Zone, Server, etc) This determines what conditions
can be defined for the rule, as well as what kinds of assets will be considered.
Each condition consists of an attribute, operator and value. The slide provides three
examples:
CpuArchitecture Contains SPARC - selects only those OS assets that are
Solaris SPARC
GearType Equal GlobalZone - selects only Solaris instances that are global
zones
ManagedState Matches MANAGED - selects only managed global zones
Further information about the allowable attributes and values is available at the following
URL:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/EM11gOC1/Asset+Attributes
Asset Grouping
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: Creating User-Defined Groups (Step 3: configure sub-groups)

If a user has selected the configure subgroups option, Enterprise Manager Ops Center will
provide a screen which allows group organization. The screen allows a user to drag and drop
groups, organizing them in a hierarchy.
Asset Grouping
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: Creating User-Defined Groups (Step 4: preview group)

If a user has selected the option Preview group before creation, the final screen allows a
user to view the assets associated with the group and any sub-groups which have been
defined.
Asset Grouping
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Grouping: User-Defined Groups in the UI

After a group has been defined, it appears as a node within the User-Defined groups view.
Each group is represented by an accordion control. Any assets defined for the group are
nested below the group, as are any sub-groups.
The Actions for the group are determined by the groups assets. If a group contains OS
assets, OS-based actions are available, while hardware actions are available for groups with
system assets.
Asset Grouping
User-Defined Groups in the UI
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Organizing Assets

Once assets have been managed, several additional actions are available:
Update Discovery Credentials: Updates the management credentials associated with
an asset. This is especially important for hardware assets, since Enterprise Manager
Ops Center directly runs management commands on the assets.
Manage Group Membership: Manages the membership of assets within user-defined
groups.
Delete: Removes assets from the Enterprise Manager Ops Center EC and Proxy. Note
that this option does NOT un-configure or un-install software from assets.
Unmanage and Delete: Un-installs software from assets, then removes assets from the
EC and Proxy. Since hardware assets do not have Enterprise Manager Ops Center
software installed, this option is the same as delete for them.
Actions for organizing assets are available in three places: at the asset itself, within the
Managed Assets tab, and in the asset view and group regions.
Asset Management
Organizing Assets
Organizing actions for assets
Update discovery credentials: Change the login credentials
for an asset
Manage group membership: Add, move or remove assets
from user-defined groups
Delete: Remove the asset from Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
Unmanage and delete: Remove any Enterprise Manager
Ops Center software, then deletes the asset
Organizing options are available in the following views
Single asset
The Managed Assets tab
Default views and user-defined groups
Hardware unmanage and delete options are the same
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Organizing Single Assets in the UI

For a single asset, the organize actions affect only the asset itself.
Asset Management
Organizing Single Assets in the UI
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Organizing Managed Assets in the UI

The Managed Assets tab allows a user to organize one or many assets. A user selects one
or more assets from the list, (control and shift keys allow multi-select) then clicks on the
desired button immediately below the All Managed Assets caption.
Asset Management
Organizing Managed Assets in the UI
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Asset Management: Organizing Grouped Assets in the UI

Groups of assets provide actions to organize everything within the group. Selecting the
appropriate organize link applies the operation to all assets associated with the group.
Asset Management
Organizing Grouped Assets in the UI
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: Users who manually install and configure agent
software on an OS instance do not need to run a discovery job
for the OS
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: b
Quiz
Which group is not defined by default in Enterprise Manager
Ops Center?
a. All Assets
b. CentOS Linux
c. Solaris Clusters
d. Solaris 8
e. Virtual Pools
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Summary
This lesson provides an explanation of how to manage assets, and of what management and
monitoring functions are available after management. Students should be able to manage
discovered assets, manually install and configure agent software, execute basic management
operations, know where to locate monitored data, create and use groups to perform
aggregate operations, and unmanage and delete assets from Enterprise Manager Ops
Center.
Summary
Understand principles of asset management and
monitoring using Enterprise Manager Ops Center
Manage discovered hardware, OS and virtual assets
Manually install and configure Enterprise Manager Ops
Center agents
Manage and monitor Enterprise Manager Ops Center
assets
Use Dashboards to view asset information and navigate in
Use standard asset views to filter assets by type
Create and manage user defined groups
Unmanage and delete assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Managing and Monitoring Assets Using Enterprise
Manager Ops Center
Managing a system and an OS asset
Examining monitored system data
Managing a system asset
Monitoring OS data
Managing an OS asset
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Provisioning Operating Systems Using Oracle
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Objectives
Identify the main OS provisioning features that Enterprise
Manager Ops Center provides
Configure DHCP to support OS provisioning
Manage OS profiles and configure a deployment plan to
support OS provisioning
Provision an operating system
Install JET modules
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
OS Provisioning Overview
Enterprise Manager Ops Center includes an operating system (OS) provisioning feature that
enables you to install operating systems onto discovered target systems. OS provisioning
uses a deployment plan and an associated OS Profile to install and configure an OS onto
target systems.
OS images provide the source of data used to install operating systems.
In general, OS provisioning uses these main steps:
Importing an OS image into a Software Library, and configuring an associated OS profile
Configuring a deployment plan that uses the profile deployment plans enable you to
organize profiles or subordinate deployment plans used to achieve specific OS
configurations.
Applying the deployment plan to one or more assets You apply a deployment plan to
one or more discovered assets to provision an operating system
Enterprise Manager Ops Centers provisioning feature installs
operating systems onto discovered target systems
Operating system installation typically proceeds without
user intervention
Complex deployment plans typically include steps that
perform OS provisioning
OS provisioning uses OS images that are stored in
Software Libraries
OS provisioning involves these main steps:
Importing an OS image into a Software Library, and
configuring an associated profile
Configuring a deployment plan that uses the profile
Applying the deployment plan to one or more assets
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates a default OS provisioning profile and Deployment
Plan for OS images that you import. You can edit or copy these default profiles, and modify
parameters that they contain.
When you create a new OS provisioning profile, you choose a profile type and target type in
the Create Profile OS Provisioning wizard. This wizard enables you to choose the specific
OS image to use, depending on the profile and target type that you select. Profile types
include:
Oracle VM Server for SPARC
Red Hat Linux
SUSE Linux
JET Template
Solaris SPARC
Solaris x86
The Create Profile OS Provisioning wizard asks you to provide values for different sets of
OS provisioning parameters, depending on the profile type that you choose to create.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center enables you to provision a
variety of operating systems and target types
Different operating systems require different configuration
parameters in their associated OS profiles
Operating systems include:
Red Hat Linux
SUSE Linux
Solaris SPARC, and Solaris x86
You can use Jumpstart Enterprise Toolkit (JET) templates
to configure Solaris OS provisioning profiles
You can modify or copy OS provisioning profiles to
configure them according to your OS provisioning needs
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
OS Provisioning Overview: Preparing for OS Provisioning

Preparing to use Enterprise Manager Ops Center to provision operating systems requires
some tasks that you perform only once, and others that you perform for every OS provisioning
event.
Importing an OS image from a directory that the Enterprise Controller can access,
uploading an OS image from a system other than the Enterprise Controller, and
downloading an OS image from Oracle, are all typically one-time events for each OS
image. Once you bring an OS image into Enterprise Manager Ops Center, it is available
for provisioning multiple specific OS configurations.
Establishing DHCP services is only required once in preparation for OS provisioning.
Creating OS profiles generally happens only once for each OS configuration that you
want to provision. Modifying profiles to reflect changes in these configurations remains
an ongoing process.
Discovering the service processors for the systems that you want to provision only
happens once for each system.
Any time that you want to provision an OS onto an already-managed system, you must
first disable monitoring and un-manage the system
Preparing for OS Provisioning
Preparing for OS provisioning requires these tasks:
Importing an OS image into Enterprise Manager Ops
Center
Enabling DHCP services on the Proxy Controllers that will
perform OS provisioning tasks
Creating an OS provisioning profile
Discovering the service processors of target systems
Disabling monitoring of any already-managed systems that
you want to provision
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing OS Profiles: Storing OS Images

You use the Upload ISO Image, Import Image, and Download OS Image actions to bring
OS images into Enterprise Manager Ops Center for use as sources of data for OS
provisioning. You use EC Local and EC NAS Software Libraries to store OS images. EC
Local libraries use file systems that are local to the Enterprise Controller. EC NAS libraries
use file systems that other systems share over the network, and that the Enterprise Controller
mounts.
This example shows four different OS images that have been loaded into an EC Local library
named ec-01-OSlib.
A note about terms: OS images are stored in ISO format. In some parts of the Enterprise
Manager Ops Center user interface, the terms OS image and ISO image are used to identify
the same object. For example, the Upload ISO image, Import Image, and Download OS
Image actions all deal with bringing OS images into Enterprise Manager Ops Center, in ISO
format. Some of these actions also enable you to import Solaris Flash archives, or FLARs.
Although a FLAR typically contains a deployable image of a Solaris instance, the FLAR file
itself is not in ISO image format, nor is a FLAR a bootable image.
Managing OS Images
Storing OS Images
Enterprise Manager Ops Center stores OS images that you use
for OS provisioning in Software Libraries
You can use either EC Local Libraries or EC NAS libraries
to store the OS images that you want to use for OS
provisioning
This example
shows four
OS images
that are
stored in an
EC Local
Library
OS Images
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing OS Profiles: Default OS Profiles

When you bring an OS image into Enterprise Manager Ops Center, the import, upload, or
download action automatically creates a default OS provisioning profile for the OS image.
The OS Provisioning node in the Plan Management panel lists the OS provisioning profiles
that exist. These default profiles act as templates from which you can create additional
versions of the profile, or that you can copy to create new profiles. In this example, all four
default profiles have only one version the original. All default profiles use names that begin
with default-profile-.
Typically you copy or edit default OS provisioning profiles to create profiles that describe how
you want to configure operating systems.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center also automatically creates a deployment plan for each OS
image that you import, upload, or download. By default these Deployment plans reference the
initial version of the associated OS provisioning profile.
Managing OS Images
Identifying Default OS Profiles
Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates a default OS
provisioning profile for each OS image that you import, upload,
or download
In the Navigation panel, default OS provisioning profiles
are located below Plan Management > Profiles and
Policies > OS Provisioning
Default OS
Provisioning Profiles
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing OS Profiles: Default OS Profiles

Enterprise Manager Ops Center also automatically creates a default deployment plan for each
OS image that you import, upload, or download. These deployment plans initially reference
version 1 of the associated OS provisioning profile.
In the Navigation panel, Enterprise Manager Ops Center locates default deployment plans
below Plan Management > Deployment Plans > Provision OS.
All default deployment plans use names that begin with default-profile-.
Managing OS Images
Identifying Default Deployment Plans
Enterprise Manager Ops Center also creates a default Deployment Plan
for each OS image that you import, upload, or download
Default OS
Provisioning Profiles
Default deployment
plans
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Configuring DHCP
Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses DHCP to support OS Provisioning operations. You must
configure DHCP services on Proxy Controllers to enable them to support OS provisioning
operations. The Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center Configuration wizard includes a
Configure DHCP on Proxy panel where you can configure DHCP services when you initially
configure Enterprise Manager Ops Center. If you choose to configure the provisioning service
outside of this wizard, you can enable DHCP services using Administration actions.
When you select a Proxy Controller in the Administration panel, three DHCP-related actions
become active:
DHCP Config configures and enables basic DHCP services on Proxy Controllers
Subnets configures subnets to use the DHCP server on a Proxy Controller for
purposes in addition to OS provisioning, or define subnets that are used with external
DHCP servers
External DHCP Servers enables you to use DHCP servers that are external to Proxy
Controllers to provide the DHCP services that OS provisioning operations require
The DHCP Config and External DHCP Servers actions are mutually exclusive.
Configuring DHCP
OS provisioning operations in Enterprise Manager Ops Center
require DHCP services configured on Proxy Controllers
Three main DHCP Configurations are possible:
Basic DHCP Services
Basic DHCP Services with defined subnets
External DHCP Servers
Select a Proxy
Controller
DHCP
configuration
actions
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Configuring DHCP: DHCP Config Action

The DHCP Config action configures and enables either a Solaris DHCP server, or an Internet
Standards Consortium (ISC) DHCP server, on the Proxy Controller that you select. For OS
provisioning to work, a Proxy Controller must be attached to the same subnet as the target
assets that you want to provision.
Use the DHCP Config action to specify this information:
DHCP Server select either ISC or Solaris to implement either the ISC reference
DHCP server, or the Solaris native DHCP server. The ISC server is generally preferred.
Interfaces select the Ethernet interface on the Proxy Controller where you want to
provide DHCP services, and use the Add button to add it to the Selected Interfaces list.
DHCP configuration is possible for multiple Ethernet interfaces in the Proxy Controller.
Enable DHCP select this option to enable the DHCP server that you selected
Configuring basic DHCP services provides the framework required for Proxy Controllers to
respond to DHCP requests from target assets. Information gathered at the time that you apply
a deployment plan supplies the specific network configuration information that target assets
need.
Configuring DHCP
DHCP Config Action
The DHCP Config action configures and enables basic DHCP
services on Proxy Controllers
Select a DHCP server type, and interfaces on which you
expect to conduct OS provisioning operations
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Configuring DHCP: Subnets Action

In cases where you have uses aside from OS provisioning for the DCHP services that you
establish on Proxy Controllers, use the Subnets action to reserve addresses for those uses.
Typically these uses include:
Providing IP address, DNS server, and router information to systems that may request
them on the same network where the Proxy Controller provides basic DHCP services for
OS provisioning
Configuring an external DHCP server
The Subnets action allows you to specify an IP address range that the DHCP server will
assign to systems that request them. The IP addresses that you specify in the Low IP Address
and High IP Address fields for the subnet define the low and high boundaries of the IP
address range.
The IP addresses that are within the range that you specify may not be used for OS
provisioning operations.
If you choose to configure an external DHCP server instead of configuring a DHCP server on
a Proxy Controller, you must configure a subnet for each network from which you might
receive relayed DHCP requests.
Configuring DHCP
Subnets Action
The Subnets action configures subnets to use the DHCP
server on a Proxy Controller for purposes in addition to OS
provisioning, or to define subnets that are used with external
DHCP servers
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Configuring DHCP: External DHCP Servers Action

The External DHCP Servers action configures the Proxy Controller to relay DHCP
configuration information to an external DHCP server for use by target assets. The DHCP
Config and External DHCP Servers actions are mutually exclusive. Use only one of these
two actions to configure DHCP services to support OS provisioning operations. The DHCP
Config action is more commonly used, and is simpler to implement.
You run the scinstall_ext_dhcp.pl script on the external DHCP server to establish
communication between the Proxy Controller and the external DHCP server. The
scninstall_ext_dhcp.pl script enables SSH access to the DHCP server without
requiring passwords.
The Subnets action allows you to define subnets where DHCP relay traffic is expected.
The External DHCP Servers action configures the Proxy Controller to relay DHCP
configuration information that Enterprise Manager Ops Center gathers using the Provision OS
wizard. The Provision OS wizard runs when you apply a deployment plan that uses an OS
provisioning profile.
You must establish DHCP relay or forwarding services on the network routers, switches, or
systems that comprise your network.
Configuring DHCP
External DHCP Servers Action
Enterprise Manager Ops Center also supports
using DHCP servers that are external to Proxy
Controllers to support OS provisioning
operations
The External DHCP Servers
action is only compatible with
the Solaris DHCP server
The External
DHCP Servers
action requires
subnets defined
by the Subnets
action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing OS Profiles: Editing or Copying OS Provisioning Profiles

When you select an OS provisioning profile from the Plan Management tab, details about the
profile display in the center panel. Review this information to determine what changes might
suit your particular OS provisioning needs.
To create a new version of an OS provisioning profile:
Navigate to Plan Management > Profiles and Policies and expand the OS
Provisioning node
Select the OS provisioning profile that you want to change
Select one of these actions:
- Edit Profile - Provide the information that the Edit Profile wizard requests
- Copy Profile Provide the information that the Create Profile OS Provisioning
wizard requests
Managing OS Profiles
Editing or Copying OS Provisioning Profiles
Edit Profile action
Profile Details
Copy Profile action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing OS Profiles: Editing or Copying OS Provisioning Profiles

The wizards that the Edit Profile and Copy Profile actions run largely request the same
information. Both of these wizards provide the opportunity to fully customize an OS
provisioning profile. The main difference between these wizards is in the first panel they
display:
The Identify Profile panel of the Edit Profile wizard allows you to edit the profile name
and description.
The Identify Profile panel of the Create Profile OS Provisioning wizard allows you to
edit the profile name and description, and choose to create a deployment plan for the
new profile.
Although the Subtype and Target Type fields in both of these panels are required, you can not
change the values that they contain.
Subsequent panels in these wizards request the same information.
Editing or Copying OS Provisioning Profiles
Edit Profile
Identify Profile
panel
Copy Profile
Identify Profile
panel
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing OS Profiles: Creating OS Provisioning Profiles

When you select either the Profiles and Policies node or the OS Provisioning node from
the Plan Management pane, the Create Profile action becomes available in the Actions
pane.
The Create Profile action runs the Create Profile wizard.
Creating OS Provisioning Profiles
OS
Provisioning
node selected
Profiles and
Policies node
selected
Create Profile
action
The Create Profile action
becomes available when
you select either the
Profiles and Policies
node, or the OS
Provisioning node in the
Plan Management pane
The Create Profile wizard
adjusts according to your
selection
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

If you select the Profiles and Policies node and select the Create Profile action, the Create
Profile wizard first asks you to select the type of profile that you want to create. The choices
correspond to the profile categories listed below the Profiles and Policies node, including
Service Processor, RAID Controller, Firmware, Dynamic System Domain, OS Provisioning,
and Logical Domain.
Select the OS Provisioning profile type.
When you select the Profiles and Policies node and select the
Create Profile action, the Create Profile wizard begins with the
Select Profile Type panel
Select OS Provisioning to create an OS provisioning profile
OS Provisioning
profile type
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

If you select the OS Provisioning node and select the Create Profile action, the Create
Profile wizard starts configuring an OS provisioning profile. When you edit or copy a profile, or
create a new profile, the wizard that runs displays the Identify Profile panel.
The Identify Profile panel enables you to provide basic information about the profile:
Name provide a name that identifies the purpose of the profile
Description provide a brief description of the profile
You can choose to create a default Deployment Plan when you create or copy a profile
Subtype select the OS that the profile will describe. The Oracle VM Server for SPARC
selection requires a compatible Solaris SPARC OS image. The JET template selection
enables you to import a JET template to define profile parameters. JET templates apply
only to Solaris OS provisioning, and Solaris-based Proxy Controllers.
Target Type select an appropriate target according to the choices offered for the
Subtype you selected
The panels that follow depend on the Subtype and Target Type that you select. The next
slides show the panels that display when you select the Solaris SPARC subtype. We will
address some of the particulars for the other subtypes after the Solaris SPARC example.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing OS Profiles: Creating a Solaris OS Provisioning Profile

The Specify OSP Parameters panel for Solaris OS provisioning profiles enables you to select
the OS image to use, and the software group within that image to install.
OS Image Select the OS image that you want this profile to use
Distribution Type Select a distribution type that this profile installs. The Distribution
Type list shows the software groups that the profile can install. A software group
represents a specific group of packages within the OS, where the Reduced Networking
Core System Support group installs the fewest number of packages, and Entire
Distribution plus OEM Support installs the largest number. Installing Enterprise Manager
Ops Center agents to manage assets requires at least the End User System Support
distribution type.
Check the Include Custom Scripts check box if you want to add custom scripts to the profile.
Creating a Solaris OS Provisioning Profile
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Specify Scripts panel enables you to specify what custom scripts to run on the target
system during the OS provisioning process.
Click the Add Script icon to add a row to the User Defined Scripts list, and provide the
following information for each script that you want to add:
Script File Provide the full path name of the script that you want to run
Type Select one of two script types:
- pre scripts that run on the target system before provisioning the operating
system
- post - scripts that run on the target system after provisioning the operating system
Scripts of the same type are concatenated and run as a single unit. Scripts must reside in a
file system that is accessible to the Enterprise Controller.
For both Solaris and Linux provisioning operations, Enterprise Manager Ops Center runs a
default set of post scripts whether or not you specify custom scripts to run.
Add Script icon
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Specify OS Setup panel enables you to specify a number of basic identity and
communication attributes for target systems. Provide the following information:
Language the language localization for the target assets
Time Zone the time zone where the target assets are located
Terminal Type the terminal type to use for the console serial port
Console Serial Port the serial port to use for the console terminal
Console Baud Rate the communication speed for the console terminal
NFS4 Domain choose either to enter dynamic to allow the target systems to
dynamically derive the NFSv4 domain, or enter a specific NFSv4 domain to use
Root Password and Confirm Password the password for the root user on the
target systems
Manual Net Boot check this box if the target systems do not have remote network
booting capability
Automatically Manage with Oracle Enterprise Manager Ops Center check this box
to install Enterprise Manager Ops Center agents onto target systems after the OS is
provisioned
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Specify Installation Parameters panel enables you to specify JumpStart Enterprise Toolkit
(JET) modules and parameters that the OS provisioning profile will use.
In the JET Modules list, provide a comma-separated list of the JET modules that this profile
will use. Include each module for which you list specific JET parameters in this panel. Leave
this field blank if you have no JET parameters to specify in this panel.
To specify JET parameters, click the Add Jet Parameter icon to add a new row to the JET
Parameters list. Provide this information for each JET parameter that you add:
Name the exact name of the JET parameter as defined in its associated JET module.
Each JET module includes a module.conf file that describes its parameters. These
files are stored in the /opt/SUNWjet/Products directory structure, for example:
/opt/SUNWjet/Products/base_config/solaris/base_config.conf.
Value an appropriate value for the named parameter
The Installing JET Modules section in this lesson describes adding JET modules to Solaris-
based Proxy Controllers.
Add JET
Parameter icon
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Specify Disk Partitions panel enables you to specify how to allocate disk space and file
systems on target systems. You can modify the default set of file systems, and add new file
systems as needed.
Click the Add Disk Partition icon to add a new row to the Disk Partitions list and define a
new partition. For each partition that you define, provide this information:
File System Type select from ufs, swap, zfs, or unnamed. The unnamed selection
allocates space to a partition, but does not create a file system
Mount Point specify the directory where the file system will mount on the target
system
Device enter the rootdisk keyword and a slice value to describe a partition on the
target system's boot disk, for example, rootdisk.s0, or enter a logical device name,
for example, c1t0d0s0, of the partition that you want to create
Size (MB) - enter the size that you want to assign to the partition, expressed in MBytes
Add Disk
Partition icon
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Specify Naming Services and Specify Networking panels both list a None option. If you
select None in these panels, you avoid specifying a naming service configuration, or
configuring either link aggregation or Internet Protocol Multipathing (IPMP).
Selecting an option other than None:
In the Specify Naming Services panel changes that panel to accept parameters for the
naming service that you chose.
In the Specify Networking panel adds more panels where you provide configuration
information for the networking option that you chose.
Choose a naming
service, or None
Chose a network
configuration, or None
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

If you choose to configure a naming service in the Specify Naming Services panel, provide
the information that is required to configure the naming that you chose:
DNS requires a DNS domain name, IP addresses of up to three name servers, and
optionally up to six search domains
NIS or NIS+ requires a NIS or NIS+ domain name, and you can either specify the
server host name and IP address, or find a server
LDAP requires an LDAP domain name, an LDAP profile name, and an LDAP profile
server. You can also optionally provide the Proxy Bind Distinguished Name and
associated password.
DNS configuration
LDAP configuration
NIS or NIS+ configuration
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

If you choose the None option in the Specify Networking panel, the Select Networks panel
enables you to associate networks with interfaces on your target systems.
To add specifications for a network interface, click the Add Network Interface icon to add a
new row to the Network Interfaces list, and provide this information:
Network enter a network address to assign to the interface. Only networks where a
Proxy Controller or external server provides DHCP services display in the Network list.
VLAN ID enter a VLAN tag ID to associate a VLAN with the profile
NIC enter a logical port name for the network interface, in the range GB_0 through
GB_11. These logical port names will be mapped to network interfaces after the asset
has been provisioned.
Boot use this radio button to identify the boot interface for the target asset. The boot
interface must use the Use Static IP address allocation method.
Address Allocation Method select one of these methods:
- Use Static IP requires that you specify an IP address when you apply the profile
to the target asset
- Assign by DHCP IP address will be provided by a DHCP server
Add Network
Interface icon
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

If you choose the Use Link Aggregation option in the Specify Networking panel, the Create
Profile OS Provisioning wizard adds the Specify Link Aggregation and Configure Link
Aggregation panels to the series it presents.
In the Specify Link Aggregation panel, provide this information:
Link Aggregation Name add a number to the static aggr prefix to create a unique
name
Network select a network from the list
NICs use logical port names GB_0 through GB_11 to represent the physical NICs to
aggregate
In the Configure Link Aggregation panel, provide this information:
Load Balancing Policy select the L2, L3, or L4 check box to choose the TCP/IP layer
used to hash outbound packets
LACP Mode select Passive, Active or Off, depending on your switch capabilities
LACP Timer select Short or Long
MAC Address Policy select Auto or Fixed
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

If you choose the Use IPMP Group option in the Specify Networking panel, the Create Profile
OS Provisioning wizard adds the Specify IPMP Group and Specify IPMP Interfaces panels
to the series it presents.
In the Specify IPMP Group panel, provide this information:
IPMP Group Name enter a name for the IPMP group
Network select a network from the list
Failure Detection select the Probe-Based check box to add probe-based detection to
the default link-based detection
In the Specify IPMP Interfaces panel, provide this information for each interface that you
define:
NIC use logical port names GB_0 through GB_11 to represent the physical NICs in the
IPMP group
Failover or Standby Interface select one of these mutually-exclusive options
Boot identify the boot interface for the target system
Assign IP Address check to assign IP addresses during provisioning
Add IPMP
Interface icon
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Summary panel displays after you provide all of the required information in preceding
panels. Review the information in this panel to verify it is correct. You can use the Previous
button to return to earlier panels and make corrections.
If the information is correct, click Finish to create the new OS provisioning profile.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing OS Profiles: Creating a Linux OS Provisioning Profile

Selecting an operating system in the Identify Profile panel determines what subsequent
panels are required to complete the Create Profile wizard.
Select one of the Linux operating systems in the Subtype list to create an OS provisioning
profile for a Linux OS.
The following slides show some of the main panels that the Create Profile wizard displays for
Linux Operating Systems, and focus on the panels used for Oracle Enterprise Linux.
The Create Profile wizard presents nearly the same panels for Oracle Enterprise Linux and
Red Hat Linux, and differs in some respects for SUSE Linux.
OS provisioning profiles for different operating systems require
the Create Profile wizard to collect different profile information
The Subtype you choose determines the panels it displays
Creating a Linux OS Provisioning Profile
To provision a
Linux OS, select:
Oracle Enterprise
Linux
Red Hat Linux
SUSE Linux
A corresponding
OS image must
exist in a Software
Library
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Distribution Type list shows Linux software categories that you can choose to install. Use
Control-click to select multiple software categories.
Similar to the steps to create Solaris OS profiles, the Create Profile OS Provisioning wizard
presents these panels:
Include Custom Scripts check box causes the Specify Scripts panel to display next,
whish requests the same information as it does for Solaris OS provisioning profiles
The Specify OS Setup panel requests language, time zone, terminal type, console serial
port and baud rate, and root password information
The Distribution Type list in the Select OSP
Parameter panel enables you to select Linux
software categories to install
Control-Click to
select multiple
Distribution Types
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Specify Installation Parameters panel enables you to provide basic installation
information for the OS profile, including:
Installation Number the registration number used to facilitate installation of all
software included in your subscription
Partition Action determines whether to remove or preserve existing disk partitions
Install Protocol sets the install protocol to either HTTP or NFS
Kernel Parameters specifies kernel parameters for the GRUB menu of target assets
Options these check boxes implement various specific configuration parameters
Include/Exclude these Linux Packages list Linux packages that you want to add or
exclude by name, precede those you want to exclude with a dash (-)
The panels that follow are similar to those for Solaris OS provisioning profiles:
Specify Disk Partitions
Specify Naming Services
Specify Networking no link aggregation or IPMP groups are available
Select Networks
The Specify Installation Parameters panel
requests basic installation information
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Specify Installation Parameters panel for SUSE Linux enables you to provide basic
installation information for the OS profile, including:
FTP Proxy Server specifies the FTP proxy server to support FTP services
HTTP Proxy Server specifies the HTTP proxy server to support HTTP services
Install Protocol sets the install protocol to either HTTP or NFS
Kernel Parameters specifies kernel parameters for the GRUB menu of target assets
Options use these check boxes to:
- Enable the FTP and HTTP proxy servers that you specified in the FTP Proxy
Server and HTTP Proxy Server fields
- Reboot the system after the OS installs
Include/Exclude these Linux Packages list Linux packages that you want to add or
exclude by name, precede those you want to exclude with a dash (-)
The Specify Installation Parameters panel for SUSE
Linux differs from that for other Linux variants
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Summary panel displays after you provide all of the required information in preceding
panels. Review the information in this panel to verify it is correct. You can use the Previous
button to return to earlier panels and make corrections.
If the information is correct, click Finish to create the new OS provisioning profile.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing Deployment Plans

Enterprise Manager Ops Center uses deployment plans to run OS provisioning operations
that OS provisioning profiles describe. A number of different actions in Enterprise Manager
Ops Center create deployment plans that you can use for OS provisioning:
When you bring a new OS image into Enterprise Manager Ops Center, that action
creates a default OS provisioning profile and a corresponding default deployment plan,
and includes the profile as a step in the plan
The Identify Profile panel in the Create Profile wizard includes a Create a deployment
plan for this profile option. Checking this option creates a new default deployment
plan, and includes the OS provisioning profile as the only step within the plan.
The Create Deployment Plan action allows you to choose profiles to include in the
plan, and to base a new plan on one of several templates
The Create Plan from Template action bases the new plan on a template for the plan
category that you select
Deployment plans for servers typically include multiple steps, including steps to perform OS
provisioning, OS updates, software installations, and other post-installation tasks.
You apply deployment plans to run OS provisioning operations
that OS provisioning profiles describe
Enterprise Manager Ops Center creates a default
deployment plan when you:
Import, upload, or download an OS image
Create a new OS provisioning profile (optional)
You can use the Create a Deployment Plan or Create
Plan from Template actions to create a new deployment
plan to use for OS provisioning
Deployment plans typically integrate multiple
deployment steps
OS provisioning might constitute one step among
several steps in a deployment plan
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing Deployment Plans: Creating a Deployment Plan

The Create Plan from Template and Create a Deployment Plan actions enable you to
create deployment plans to use for OS provisioning. The node that you select in the Plan
Management panel determines which of these actions becomes available.
You can also use the Edit Deployment Plan or Copy Deployment Plan actions to modify or
duplicate a deployment plan for OS provisioning. These actions become active when you
select a deployment plan from Plan Management > Deployment Plans > Provision OS.
Creating a Deployment Plan
To create a deployment plan to use for OS provisioning, use
the Create Plan from Template or Create a Deployment Plan
action
Selecting Plan Management >
Deployment Plans > Provision OS
enables the Create Plan from Template
action
Selecting Deployment
Plans enables the
Create a Deployment
Plan action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Managing Deployment Plans: Creating a Deployment Plan

To create a deployment plan for OS provisioning, select Plan Management > Deployment
Plans > Provision OS and select the Create Plan from Template action. The Create a
Deployment Plan panel displays, and the deployment plan is based on the Provision OS
template.
In the Create a Deployment Plan panel, provide the following information:
Plan Name - a name for the deployment plan
Description a brief description of the deployment plan
Failure Policy select an option to determine what happens if steps in the plan fail
In the Deployment Plan Steps table, select the OS provisioning profile that you want to
use from the pull-down list in the Associated Profile/Deployment Plan column.
Click Save to create the deployment plan.
Remember that if you change the OS provisioning profile that this deployment plan
references, and consequently create a new profile version, you must edit the deployment plan
if you want it to use the new profile version.
The Create Profile icon allows you to define a new profile to add to the plan.
The Associated Profile/Deployment Plan icon allows you to view the associated profile or plan
Creating a Deployment Plan
Create Profile
icon
Associated
Profile/Deploy
ment Plan
icon
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Provisioning an OS
When you apply a deployment plan that includes an OS provisioning step, an OS provisioning
job starts. Steps in deployment plans run sequentially, so the OS provisioning job will run
according to where it is listed in the plans steps.
You can apply a deployment plan for OS provisioning by first selecting a deployment plan:
Select Plan Management > Deployment Plans > Provision OS and select the
deployment plan that you want to apply
Select the Apply Deployment Plan action
Complete the wizard that the Apply Deployment Plan action starts
You can apply a deployment plan for OS provisioning by first selecting an asset or group of
assets:
Select Assets > All Assets > Servers and select the asset that you want to provision
or -
Select Assets > Servers > and select the group of servers that you want to provision
Select the Install Server action
Complete the wizard that the Install Server action starts. Note that this action shows
only the OS provisioning plans that match the kind of server that you have selected to
install.
Provisioning an OS
You apply a deployment plan to start an OS provisioning job
You can apply a deployment plan by:
Apply
Deployment
Plan action
Selected
deployment
plan
Selecting the deployment plan and
selecting the Apply Deployment
Plan action
Selecting an asset or
group of assets, and
selecting the Install
Server action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Provisioning an OS: Apply Deployment Plan Action

When you select the Apply Deployment Plan action, the Select Target Assets panel
displays. Select the asset or assets that you want to provision, and click Add to Target List
to add them to the Target List.
You can use Control-Click to select multiple assets in the Available Items list, or you can
select and add them individually to the Target List. The Provision OS wizard runs after you
complete this panel.
Apply with minimal interaction causes the Provision OS wizard to only collect
information that it requires that the OS provisioning profile does not provide
Allow me to override any profile values - causes the Provision OS wizard to display
all of the panels used to define an OS provisioning profile
Click Next.
Provisioning an OS
Apply Deployment Plan Action
Click to add
assets to the
Target List
Select one
or more
assets
Choose how to
apply the
deployment plan
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Provisioning an OS: Install Server Action

When you select the Install Server action, the Install Server panel displays. Select the
deployment plan that you want to apply to your selected assets. The Provision OS wizard
runs after you complete this panel.
Apply with minimal interaction causes the Provision OS wizard to only collect
required information that the OS provisioning profile does not provide
Allow me to override any profile values - causes the Provision OS wizard to display
all of the panels used to define an OS provisioning profile
Click Apply Plan.
Provisioning an OS
Install Server Action
Selected asset
group
Install Server
action
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Provisioning an OS: Provision OS Wizard Minimal Interaction

The Apply Deployment Plan and Install Server actions both run the Provision OS wizard
after you complete the Select Target Assets and Install Server panels that they respectively
present. If you select the Apply with minimal interaction option in these panels, the
Provision OS wizard requests the network address information required to complete the
provisioning process.
In the Specify Network Interfaces panel, provide this information:
Network select a configured network from the pull-down list
IP Ranges use a comma-separated list of IP addresses to specify specific IP
addresses to assign to the target assets, or a range of IP addresses (expressed as
nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn-yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy) that the wizard will allocate to target assets
Provisioning an OS
Provision OS Wizard Minimal Interaction
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

The Resource Assignments panel enables you to change the network address assignments
that the Provision OS wizard assigned to the target assets. You can change the selected
network and the assigned IP address in this panel.
Provisioning an OS
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

If you selected the Apply with minimal interaction option in the Select Target Assets and
Install Server panels, the Summary panel displays after you provide the required network-
related information.
Click Apply to apply the plan and start the OS provisioning job.
Provisioning an OS
Click Apply to
apply the
deployment plan
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Provisioning an OS: Provision OS Wizard Override Values

If you selected the Allow me to override any profile values option in the Select Target
Assets and Install Server panels, the Provision OS wizard begins the complete OS
provisioning profile configuration process. The Provision OS wizard presents the same set of
configuration panels as described earlier in this lesson. These panels include but are not
limited to the following:
Specify OSP Parameters select a distribution type, enables including custom scripts
Specify OS Setup set language, time zone, terminal characteristics, NFSv4 domain,
root password
Specify Installation Parameters provide JET parameters to further customize the
installation
Specify Disk Partitions define disk partition and file system parameters
Specify Naming Services select a naming service to configure
Specify Networking configure link aggregation or define IPMP groups
Select Networks determine the networks to use in the provisioning process
Specify Network Interfaces select a configured network and supply IP address ranges
Resource Assignments review or change network information for assets
Provisioning an OS
Provision OS Wizard Override Values
Complete list of OS
provisioning profile
configuration panels
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Provisioning an OS: Provision OS Wizard Override Values

If you selected the Allow me to override any profile values option in the Select Target
Assets and Install Server panels, the Summary panel displays after you complete or pass
through all of the OS provisioning profile configuration panels, and the two network-related
panels that complete the information required for OS provisioning to succeed.
Click Apply to apply the plan and start the OS provisioning job.
Provisioning an OS
Provision OS Wizard Override Values
Click Apply to
apply the
deployment plan
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Installing JET Modules

OS provisioning in Enterprise Manager Ops Center makes use of Oracles JumpStart
Enterprise Toolkit, known as JET. JET provides a framework that extends JumpStart
installation capabilities for provisioning the Oracle Solaris operating system.
Panels in wizards associated with OS provisioning allow you to specify JET parameters and
use JET templates.
The Specify Installation Parameters panel in the Provision OS wizard enables you to
specify values for JET parameters that further customize Solaris OS installations
The Identify Profile panel in the Create Profile wizard enables you to import a JET
template to configure Solaris OS provisioning profiles
You can make use of the default set of JET modules and parameters that install with
Enterprise Manager Ops Center, and you can add optional JET modules to Enterprise
Manager Ops Center and use the parameters that they contain.
You use JET in Enterprise Manager Ops Center when you provision Solaris SPARC and X86
platforms.
JET runs only on Solaris-based Proxy Controllers.
Enterprise Manager Ops Center includes Oracle's JumpStart
Enterprise Toolkit (JET)
OS provisioning operations use JET to perform Solaris OS
installations
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Installing an Enterprise Controller with its co-located Proxy Controller, or a remote Proxy
Controller installs the following default set of JET modules:
base_config - Provides the standard installation configuration for the client,
including the information required to set up the JumpStart server to allow the client to
boot and build.
custom - Adds functionality to the JumpStart framework to handle packages, patches,
scripts, and files
flash - Adds the ability for the JumpStart server to deliver Solaris images in Solaris
Flash format
jass - Adds the ability for the JumpStart server to install, configure, and execute
JASS, now known as the Solaris Security Toolkit
ldom - Adds capability to install and configure Logical Domains
To use JET modules beyond the default set that is installed with Enterprise Manager Ops
Center, you must download the JET datastream package, and install modules that it contains.
JET version 4.8 is included in Enterprise Manager Ops
Center, and includes these modules:
base_config, custom, flash, jass, ldom
The/opt/SUNWjet/Products directory on Proxy
Controllers contains the installed JET modules, each within
its own sub-directory
You must manually install any JET module that you want
to use that is not delivered in the default set
You install additional JET modules onto the Enterprise
Controller, and onto the Proxy Controllers that will use them
for OS provisioning operations
JET modules are only used on Solaris OS-based Enterprise
Manager Ops Center Proxy Controllers
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Installing JET Modules: Obtaining JET Packages

The JET datastream package itself contains the complete set of JET packages. JET
packages install JET modules. The JET datastream package is delivered as a bzip2
compressed archive.
JET version 4.8 is available here:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/JET/Home
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/indexes/downloads/sun-az-
index-095901.html
Obtaining JET Packages
You can download the JET datastream package from
these locations:
http://wikis.sun.com/display/JET/Home
http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/indexes/downl
oads/sun-az-index-095901.html
The JET datastream package is named jet.pkg.bz2
After it is uncompressed, you can use the pkginfo
command to view the JET packages that the datastream
package contains:
pkginfo d jet.pkg
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Installing JET Modules (continued)

Use this procedure to install JET modules:
Use bunzip2 to uncompress the JET datastream package, if needed:
- # bunzip2 jet.pkg.bz2
Use pkginfo to view the packages that the datastream package contains
- # pkginfo d jet.pkg
- The JET version 4.8 datastream package contains these packages
JetEXPLO jet explo product
JetFLASH JET flash product
JetISO JET ISO product
JetJASS JASS product
JetLDOM JET LDOM product
JetRBAC JET RBAC product
JetSAN JET san product
JetSBD Secure By Default product
JetSDS JET sds product
JetVTS JET VTS product
JetWanBoot JET WanBoot support
JetZFS JET zfs product
JetZONES JET Zones module
SUNWjet Sun JumpStart Enterprise Toolkit
SUNWjetd JET Documentation
Identify the names of the JET packages that you want to install
Use pkgadd to add the packages that you want to the Proxy Controller, for example:
- # pkgadd d jet.pkg JetZONES JetZFS
Verify that the new modules were installed below the /opt/SUNWjet/Products
directory on the Proxy Controller
With the new JET modules installed, you can specify parameters that the modules contain
where they are required in Enterprise Manager Ops Center wizards.
Always be sure to specify parameter names that exactly match the parameter names that the
JET modules define.
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: e
Quiz
Which of these objects are required for OS provisioning to
proceed in Enterprise Manager Ops Center?
a. An OS image in ISO format in a Software Library
b. Functioning DHCP services on a Proxy Controller or
external DHCP server
c. A defined OS provisioning profile
d. A deployment plan that includes an OS provisioning profile
as a step
e. All of the above
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
True or False: An OS provisioning profile can include custom
scripts that run either before or after the OS provisioning job
installs the operating system.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: a
Quiz
Which of the following items is not a profile subtype listed in the
Create Profile - OS Provisioning wizard?
a. Oracle VM Server for x86
b. Oracle Enterprise Linux
c. JET Template
d. Solaris SPARC
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: b
Quiz
True or False: Selecting the Apply with minimal interaction
option in the Select Target Assets and Install Server panels
causes the Provision OS wizard to present the panels that
define an OS provisioning profile.
a. True
b. False
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Answer: d
Quiz
Which of these items is not a JET module that is installed when
you install Enterprise Manager Ops Center?
a. base_config
b. custom
c. flash
d. zfs
e. ldom
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

Summary
Identify the main OS provisioning features that Enterprise
Manager Ops Center provides for different operating
systems
Create and edit OS provisioning profiles, and create a
deployment plan to support OS provisioning
Configure DHCP to support OS provisioning, and configure
subnets for other uses
Provision an operating system
Identify default JET components, and install JET modules
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
Practice 8 Overview: Provisioning Operating Systems

These practices provision the Solaris 10 operating system onto the asset-nn system in each
students assigned set of systems.
Note that the Solaris installation process typically takes about an hour to complete. It is
advisable to perform the steps in the first three practices, and then proceed to the next lesson
while the OS installation completes. You can perform the last practice when it is convenient.
Provisioning Operating Systems
Unmanaging an OS Asset
Creating an OS profile
Provisioning a Solaris 10 image
Verifying provisioning of an asset
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s
C
h
e
n
g

t
i
o
n
g

e
r
i
c

A
n
g

(
e
r
i
c
a
n
g
@
o
r
a
c
l
e
c
o
m
)

h
a
s

a

n
o
n
-
t
r
a
n
s
f
e
r
a
b
l
e
l
i
c
e
n
s
e

t
o

u
s
e

t
h
i
s

S
t
u
d
e
n
t

G
u
i
d
e
U
n
a
u
t
h
o
r
i
z
e
d

r
e
p
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

o
r

d
i
s
t
r
i
b
u
t
i
o
n

p
r
o
h
i
b
i
t
e
d

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t

2
0
1
2
,

O
r
a
c
l
e

a
n
d
/
o
r

i
t
s

a
f
f
i
l
i
a
t
e
s

D69265GC10 sg1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D69265GC10 sg1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D69265GC10

Copyright 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Copyright 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 2

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center R1 Value Proposition

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center R1 Business Challenges

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 5

Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center

Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center (continued)

Oracle Enterprise Manager and Ops Center: Ops Center Overview

Ops Center Product Compatibility: Application Software Requirements

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 13

Product Compatibility : OS Management Capabilities

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 15

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 16

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 18

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 19

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 20

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 21

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 22

Main Features: Discover and Management

Main Features: Provisioning

Main Features: OS Update

Main Features: Monitoring

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 27

Main Features: Reporting

Main Features: Reporting (continued)

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 30

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 31

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 32

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 33

User Interface: Navigation Panel

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 35

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 36

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 37

User Interface: Jobs Panel

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 1 - 41

Copyright 2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 2

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Overview

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Overview (continued)

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Basic Deployment

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 6

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 7

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 8

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 9

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 10

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Co-located Proxy Controller

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 12

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Architecture: Multiple Proxy Controllers

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 14

Communication Methods: Connected Mode

Communication Methods: Disconnected Mode

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 17

Communication Methods: Ports, Protocols and Connections

Communication Methods: Ports and Protocols

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 20

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 21

Communication Methods: Subscription Model

Oracle Enterprise Manager 11g Ops Center Release 1 Administration 2 - 23

Communication Methods: Aggregated Data Model

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Technologies: Assets

Enterprise Manager Ops Center Technologies: Assets (continued)